Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAbout8/29/14 projectmanual DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC WORKS ENGINEERING DIVISION PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, PROPOSAL AND CONTRACT FOR THE CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 IOWA CITY, IOWA May 30, 2014 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURTHVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 00 0107 -SEALS & SIGNATURES I hereby certify that the portion of this technical submission described below was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and responsible charge. I am a dulyLicensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Iowa. Dwight C. Schumm _______________________________________________ SignatureDate Discipline: Mechanical Engineer, Iowa License No. 13694 License expires December 31, 2014 Pages or sheets covered by this seal: Divisions 00, 01,23, 26 END OF SECTION SEALS AND SIGNATURES 00 01 07-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURTHVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SEALS AND SIGNATURES 00 01 07-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURTHVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT2014 SECTION 000110-TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 00-Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 0107Seals & Signatures 00 0110Table of Contents 00 0120List of Drawings NP-1Notice of Public Hearing NTB-1Notice to Bidders NB-1Note to Bidders IB-1Instruction to Bidders PS-1Pre-Bid Substitutions FP-1Form of Proposal BB-1Bid Bond AG-1Form of Agreement PB-1Performance and Payment Bond CC-1Contract Compliance (Anti-discrimination Requirements) GC-1General Conditions SC-1Supplementary Conditions BS-1Bidder Status Form DIVISION 01-General Requirements 011000Summary of Work 01 2600Contract Modification Procedures 01 2900Payment Procedures 01 3100Project Management and Coordination 01 3300Submittal Procedures 015000Temporary Facilities 017050Contract Closeout 017200Project Record Documents 01 7329Cutting and Patching 01 7823Operation and Maintenance Data 01 7900Demonstration and Training DIVISION 23-Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning 230010HVACGeneral Provisions 230500Common Work Results for HVAC TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURTHVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT2014 230513Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment 23 0529Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping andEquipment 23 0548Vibration Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 0553Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 23 0593Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 23 0700HVAC Insulation 23 0900Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 23 2123HydronicPumps 23 2300Refrigerant Piping 233113Metal Ducts 23 3300Air Duct Accessories 237400Packaged Outdoor HVAC Equipment 23 8126Split System Air Conditioners DIVISION 26-Electrical 260010ElectricalGeneral Provisions 26 0500Common Work Results for Electrical 26 0519Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 0526Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 0529Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems 26 0533Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 0553Identification for Electrical Systems 26 2815Motor and Service Disconnects 26 2816Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers 26 2923Variable-Frequency Motor Controllers END OF SECTION 000110 TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 000120–LIST OF DRAWINGS GENERAL T1.0TITLESHEET STRUCTURAL S1.0STRUCTURAL PLAN HVAC HD1.0LOWER LEVEL HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN HD1.1FIRST FLOOR HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN HD1.2SECOND FLOOR HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN HD1.3THRID FLOOR HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN HD1.4ROOF HVAC DEMOLITION PLAN H1.0LOWER LEVEL HVAC PLAN H1.1FIRST FLOOR HVAC PLAN H1.2SECOND FLOOR HVAC PLAN H1.3THIRD FLOOR HVAC PLAN H1.4ROOF HVAC PLAN H5.0HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS H5.1HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS H5.2HVAC SCHEDULES AND DETAILS END OF SECTION 000120 LIST OF DRAWINGS 000120-1 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING ON PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, FORM OF CONTRACT AND ESTIMATED COST FOR CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 IN THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA TO ALL TAXPAYERS OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, AND TO OTHER INTERESTED PERSONS: Public notice is hereby given that the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, will conduct a public hearing on plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost for the construction of the CITY HALL th NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 in said City at 7 p.m. on the 17 day of June, 2014, said meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall in City Hall in said City, or if said meeting is cancelled, at the next meeting of the City Council thereafter as posted by the City Clerk. Said plans, specifications, form of contract and estimated cost are now on file in the office of the City Clerk in City Hall in Iowa City, Iowa, and may be inspected by any interested persons. Any interested persons may appear at said meeting of the City Council for the purpose of making objections to and comments concerning said plans, specifications, contract or the cost of making said improvement. This notice is given by order of the City Council of the City of Iowa City, Iowa and as provided by law. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK pweng\masters\nph.doc 9/99 NOTICE TO BIDDERS CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Iowa City, Iowa, before 2:30 P.M. on the th 10 day of July, 2014. Sealed proposals will be opened immediately thereafter by the City Engineer or designee. Bids submitted by fax machine shall not be deemed a "sealed bid" for purposes of this Project. Proposals received after this deadline will be returned to the bidder unopened. Proposals will be acted upon by the City Council at a meeting to be held in the Emma J. Harvat Hall at 7:00 P.M. on the 15th day of July, 2014, or at a special meeting called for that purpose. The Project will involve the following: the removal and replacement of the City Hall North Court Trane HVAC unit serving areas of the City Hall facility. The work will involve provisions to address pressurization issues in the system and an installation of an open platform networked digital controls for all new equipment as well as upgrading the controls for all terminal boxes associated with the replaced HVAC units. There will be a recommended pre-bid meeting held on site, at City Hall, starting at 10:00 a.m. in the Helling Conference room at 410 East Washington Street, on Thursday, June 26, 2014. All work is to be done in strict compliance with the plans and specifications prepared by Design Engineers, of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, which have heretofore been approved by the City Council, and are on file for public examination in the Office of the City Clerk. sealed Each proposal shall be completed on a form furnished by the City and must be accompanied in a envelope, separate from the one containing the proposal, by a bid bond executed by a corporation authorized to contract as a surety in the State of Iowa, in the sum of 10% of the bid. The bid security shall be made payable to the TREASURER OF THE CITY OF IOWA CITY, IOWA, and shall be forfeited to the City of Iowa City in the event the successful bidder fails to enter into a contract within ten (10) calendar days of the the contract and maintenance of said Project, if required, pursuant to the provisions of this notice and the other contract documents. Bid bonds of the lowest two or more bidders may be retained for a period of not to exceed fifteen (15) calendar days following award of the contract, or until rejection is made. Other bid bonds will be returned after the canvass and tabulation of bids is completed and reported to the City Council. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor, and also protect and save harmless the City from all claims and damages of any kind caused directly or indirectly by the operation of the contract, and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the improvement for a period of one (1 ) year(s) from and after its com- pletion and formal acceptance by the City Council. The following limitations shall apply to this Project: Substantial Completion Date: November 26, 2014 Specified Final Completion Date: December 19, 2014 Liquidated Damages: $1,117.00 per day The plans, specifications and proposed contract documents may be examined at the office of the City Clerk. Copies of said plans and specifications and form of proposal blanks may be secured at Technigraphics, a division of Rapids Reproductions located at 415 Highland Ave, Suite 100, Iowa City, Iowa 52240, Phone :319-354-5950 Fax:319-354-8973 Toll-Free 800-779-0093 by bona fide bidders. A $ 50.00 refundable fee is required for each set of plans and specifications provided to bidders or other interested persons. The fee shall be in the form of a check, made payable to Technigraphics. The fee will be returned if the plans are returned in unmarked and reusable condition within 15 days of Council Award. A separate and nonrefundable $15.00 shipping and handling fee will apply to plans that are sent through postal mail. Prospective bidders are advised that the City of Iowa City desires to employ minority contractors and subcontractors on City projects. A listing of minority contractors can be obtained from the Iowa Department of Economic Development at (515) 242-4721 and the Iowa Department of Transportation Contracts Office at (515) 239-1422. Bidders shall list on the Form of Proposal the names of persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidder intends to subcontract. This list shall include the type of work and approximate subcontract amount(s). The Contractor awarded the contract shall submit a list on the Form of Agreement of the proposed subcontractors, together with quantities, unit prices and extended dollar amounts. By virtue of statutory authority, preference must be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced within the State of Iowa, and to Iowa domestic labor, to the extent lawfully required under Iowa Statutes. The Iowa reciprocal resident bidder preference law applies to this Project. The City reserves the right to reject any or all proposals, and also reserves the right to waive technicalities and irregularities. Published upon order of the City Council of Iowa City, Iowa. MARIAN K. KARR, CITY CLERK Pweng/masters/noticetobidders.doc NOTE TO BIDDERS 1.The successful bidder and all subcontractors are required to submit at least 4 days prior to award three references involving similar projects, including at least one municipal reference. Award of the bid or use of specific subcontractors may be denied if sufficient favorable references are not verified or may be denied based on past experience on projects with the City of Iowa City. 2.References shall be addressed to the City Engineer and include the name, address and phone number of the contact person, for City verification. 3.Bid submittals are: Envelope 1:Bid Bond Envelope 2:Form of Proposal NB-1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ARTICLE 1 -DEFINITIONS 1.1Bidding documents include the bidding requirements and the contract documents. The bidding requirements include the Advertisement or Invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, the Bid Form, other sample bidding and contract forms, and the Contract Forms including addenda issued prior to receipt of bids. 1.2The contract documents for the work consist of the Owner/Contractor Agreement, the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications and all addenda issued prior to and all modifications issued after execution of the Contract. 1.3Definitions set forth in AIA document A201, “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction”, 2007 edition, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the bidding documents. A.Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by addition, deflection, clarifications or correction. B.A bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the work or designated portion thereof for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the bidding documents. C.The base bid is the sum stated in the bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the work described in the bidding documents as the Base, to which work may be added, or from which work may be deducted for sums stated in alternate bids. D.An alternate bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the base bid if the corresponding change in the work, as described in bidding documents, is accepted. E.A unit price is an amount stated in the bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services as described in thebidding documents or in the contract documents. F.Abidder is a person or entity who submits a bid. G.Asub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the work. ARTICLE 2 –BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS 2.1The bidder by making a bid represents that the bidder has read and understands the bidding documents, and the bid is made in accordance with those documents. 2.2The Bidder has read and understands the bidding documents or contract documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the work for which the bid is submitted. IB-1 2.3The bidder has visited the site, has become familiar with local conditions under which the work is to be performed, and has correlated the bidder’s personal observations with the requirements of the contract documents. The bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the bidding 2.4 documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 –BIDDING DOCUMENTS 3.1Copies A.Complete sets of the bidding documents may be obtained from the office of Office Technigraphics, a division of Rapids Reproductions located at 415 of Highland Ave, Suite 100, Iowa City, Iowa 52240, Phone:319-354-5950 Fax: 319-354-8973 Toll-Free 800-779-0093 by bona fide bidders ,for the deposit sum as indicated. The deposit will be refunded to plan holders who return the bidding documents in good condition within 15days after receipt of bids.A bidder receiving a contract award may retain the bidding documents, and his deposit will be refunded. Successful sub-bidders, including material suppliers, may retain their bidding documents, and their deposit will be refunded if the Architect receives written notification within the 30 calendar day period following receipt of bids. B.Bidders shall use complete sets of bidding documents in preparing bids. Neither the Owner nor the Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of bidding documents. No partial sets will be issued. C.In makingcopies of the bidding documents available on the above terms, the Owner and the Architect do so only for the purpose of obtaining bids for the work, and do nor confer license or grant permission for any other use of the bidding documents. D.Copies of the reports and drawings that are not included with the Bidding Documentsmay be examined at Engineering Division at City Hall, Iowa City, Iowa during regular business hours, or may be obtained from the Owner at Owner’s reproduction cost, plus handling charge. These reports and drawings are not part of the contract documents, but the “technical data” contained therein upon which the bidder may rely as identified and established above, are incorporated therein by reference. 3.2Interpretation or Correction of Bidding Documents A.The bidder shall carefully study and compare the bidding documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the work for which the bid is being submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. B.Bidders and sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the bidding documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least nine days prior to the date for receipt of bids. IB-2 C.Interpretations, corrections and changes of the bidding documents will be made by addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes to the bidding documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and bidders shall not rely upon them. 3.3Substitutions A.The materials, products and equipment described in the bidding documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met byany proposed substitution. Refer tothe Pre-bidSubstitution Section of the Project Manual and formfor substitution requirements. B.If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of bids, such approval will be set forth in an addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. 3.4Addenda A.Addenda will be mailed or delivered to all who are known by the Architect to have a complete set of bidding documents. B.Copies of addenda will be made available for inspection wherever bidding documents are on file for that purpose. C.No addenda will be issued later than four (4)days prior to the date for receipt of bids, except for any one or more of the following reasons: 1.An addendum withdrawing the request for bids. 2.An addendum which includes postponement of the date for receipt of bids. 3.An addendum issued after receipt of bids and prior to execution of the contract. D.Each bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a bid that he has received all addenda issued, and the bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the proper location on the bid form. ARTICLE 4 –BIDDING PROCEDURES 4.1Form and Style of Bids A.A separate copy of the bid form iscontained within the back cover of this document. B.Fill in all blanks on the bid formby typewriter or manually in ink. C.Where so indicated by the makeup of the bid form, sums shall be expressed in both words and numerals, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words will govern. D.Interlineations, alterations or erasures shall be initialed by the signer of the bid. E.All requested alternates shall be bid. If no change in the base bid is required, enter “No Change”. IB-3 F.Where two or more bids for designated portions of the work have been requested, the bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the bidder’s refusal to accept award of less than the combination of bids stipulated by the bidder. The bidder shall make no additional stipulation on the bid form, nor qualify the bid in any other manner. G.Each copy of the bid shall include the legal name of the bidder and a statement that the bidder is a sole proprietor, a partnership, a corporation or some other legal entity. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a contract. A bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent’s authority to bind the bidder. H.No bid may be withdrawn for a period of 30 calendar days after the date of opening. 4.2Bid Security A.Each bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the amount of ten percent (10 %) of the base bid and in the form of surety bond pledging that the bidder will enter into a contract with the Owner on the items stated in his bid and will, if requested, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the contract and the payment of all obligations arising there under. Should the bidder refuse to enter intosuch contract or fail to furnish such bond if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. A cashier’s not check, cash or certified check will be an accepted bid bond. B.Surety bond shall be written on enclosed “Bid Bond”form bound within the project manual and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of power of attorney. C.The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of bidders to whom an award is being considered until either: 1.The contract has been executed and bonds have been furnished. 2.The specified time has elapsed so that the bids may be withdrawn. 3.All bids have been rejected. 4.3Submission of Bids A.All copies of the bid, the bid security and other documents required to be submitted with the bid shall be enclosed in sealed opaque envelopes as instructed in Section NB –Note to Bidders. Both envelopes shall be addressed to the party receiving thebids (“City Clerk, City of Iowa City”), and shall be identified with the project name, the bidder’s name and address, and the envelope’s contents. If the bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelopes shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation “SEALED BID ENCLOSED” on the face of that envelope. B.Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of bids. 1.Location: Office of City Clerk, City Hall, 410 East Washington Street, IB-4 Iowa City, Iowa 52240 . 2.Time and Date: Before2:30 p.m. on Thursday July 10, 2014 C.Bids received after the time and date for receipt of bids will be returned unopened. D.The bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of bids. E.Oral, telephonic, or telegraphic bids are invalid and will not receive consideration. 4.4Modification or Withdrawal of Bid A.A bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled the bidderafter the stipulated time and date designated for the receipt of bids, and each bidder so agrees in submitting his bid. B.Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of bids, a bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving bids at the place designated for receipt of bids. Such notice shall be in writing, signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a contract. If written notice is electronic, written confirmation from the person or persons legally authorized to bind the bidder to a contract shall also be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for receipt of bids, and it shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original bid. C.Withdrawn bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. D.Bid security shall be in an amount sufficient for the bid as modified or resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 –CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 5.1Opening of Bids A.The properly identified bids received ontime will be opened publicly and will be read aloud. 5.2Rejection of Bids A.The Owner will have the right to reject any or all bids, and to reject a bid not accompanied by the required bid security or by another data required by the bidding documents, or to reject a bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular. 5.3Acceptance of Bid (Award) A.It is the intent of the Owner to award a contract to the lowest responsive responsible bidder provided the bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the bidding documents, and does not exceed the funds IB-5 available. The Owner will have the right to waive informalities or irregularities in a bid received, and to accept the bidwhich, in his judgment, is in his own best interest. B.The Owner will have the right to accept bid alternates in any order or combination, and to determine the low bidder on the basis of the sum of the base bid and the accepted alternates. ARTICLE 6 –POST-BID INFORMATION 6.1Submittals A.The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom the bidderintendsto enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract will be submitted within 24 hours of bid opening by the apparent lowest responsive, responsible bidder. B.The bidder shall, within seven (7) days of notification of selection for the award of a contract for the work, submit the following information to the Architect: 1.A designation of the work to be performed by the bidder with the bidder’s own forces. 2.The proprietary names and the suppliers or principal items or system of materials and equipment proposed for the project. C.The bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and the Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the work described in the bidding documents. D.Prior to the award of the contract, the Architect will notify the bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity. If the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to such proposed person or entity, the bidder may, at the bidder’s option: 1.Withdraw the bid. 2.Submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the bid price to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. D.The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or may disqualify the bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. ARTICLE 7 –PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR & MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND 7.1Bond Requirements IB-6 A.The bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of contract and the payment of all obligations arising there under. Bonds may be secured through the bidder’s usual sources. The cost of furnishing such bonds shall be included in the bid. B.If the Owner requires that bonds be obtained from other than the bidder’s usual source, all change in cost will be adjusted as provided in contract documents. 7.2The Time of Delivery and Form of Bonds A.The bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three (3) days following the date of execution of the contract. If the work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the bidder shall, prior to commencement of the work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered. B.The bonds shall be written on the “Performance and Payment Bond” form bound within the project manual, or a copy thereof. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the contract sum. C.The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the contract. D.The bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix a current and certified copy of power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 –PRE-BID CONFERENCE 8.1Conference Bidder is encouraged to attend a pre-bid conference onThursday,June 26, 2014 A. at 10:00AM local time,startingin the Helling Conference Room in the City Hall Lobby in City Hall at 410 East Washington Street in Iowa City, Iowa. 8.2Parking A.Limited metered parking is available neighboring City Hall. Otherwise a hourly pre- pay parking is available south of City Hall at Chauncey Swan Ramp or a hourly-fee parking is available in Tower Place, located west of City Hall at 335 East Iowa Avenue, the entrance is on the Iowa Avenue side of the ramp. S:\ENG\ARCHIT~1\Projects\CITYHA~1\2014CI~1\CITYHA~2\CITYHA~1\FRONTE~1\IB -Instructions to Bidders-City Hall North Court HVAC Replacement Project 2014.doc IB-7 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 Design Engineers C/O Tim Lentz 8801 Prairie View Lane SW Suite 200 Cedar Rapids, IA 52404 CITY OF IOWA CITY CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 FORM OF PROPOSAL CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 CITY OF IOWA CITY BIDDERS PLEASE NOTE: PLEASE DO NOT USE THE FORM OF PROPOSAL INCLUDED IN THE BOUND VOLUME OF THE PROJECT MANUAL. SEPARATE COPIES OF THIS PROPOSAL ARE CONTAINED WITHIN THE BACK COVER OF THIS DOCUMENT. Name of Bidder: Address of Bidder: 2:30PM local time on Thursday,July 10, 2014 BIDS RECEIVED BEFORE: TO:City Clerk City of Iowa City City Hall 410 East Washington Street Iowa City, Iowa 52240 In response to your request for bids, and in compliance with the Procurement and Contracting Requirements, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials and equipment, all supervision, coordination, and all related incidentals necessary to perform the work to complete CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 in strict accordance with the Project Manual and the Drawings dated May 30, 2014, including Addenda numbered _____, _____ and _____, inclusive, prepared by Design Engineers,for the Base Bid Lump Sum of : BASE BID Dollars ($) The undersigned bidder submits herewith bid security in the amount of $_______________, ten percent (10%) of the Base Bid amount. BID ALTERNATES: Alternate No. 1: Remove existing hot water pump and controller. Install two new pumps in parallel with variable speed drives controlled by the building automation system. Install new differential pressure sensor for control of pumps ADD the Sum of: Dollars ($) Alternate No. 2: Replace existing circuit setters, air vents, strainers and connecting piping for 36 VAVs. ADD the Sum of: FP-1 Dollars ($) The names of those persons, firms, companies or other parties with whom we intend to enter into a major subcontract, together with the type of subcontracted work and approximate dollar amount of the subcontract will be submitted within 24 hours of bid opening by the apparent lowest responsive, responsible bidder. NOTE: All subcontractors are subject to approval by City. The undersigned bidder certifies that this proposal is made in good faith, and without collusion or connection with any other person or persons bidding on the work. The undersigned bidder states that this proposal is made in conformity with the Contract Documents and agrees that, in the event of any discrepancies or differences between any conditions of this proposal and the Contract Documents prepared by the City of Iowa City, the more specific shall prevail. In submitting this Proposal, The undersigned agrees that the Bid will not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) consecutive calendar days following the date of the Bid Opening. Further, that if a Notice to Proceed or a prepared Agreement provided by the Owner is received at the business address identified below within the thirty (30) day period, the undersigned will, within ten (10) days of receipt, acknowledge acceptance of the contract award. The undersigned will then execute and deliver to the Owner address the Agreement, the Procurement, Labor and Material Payment Bonds, and the certificates of insurance, and will proceed in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents for this project, and have the Project at Substantial Completion on or before November 26, 2014. Firm: Signature: Printed Name: Title: Address: ____________________________________ Phone: Contact: FP-2 BID BOND ______________________________, as Principal, and __________________________, as Surety declare that we are held and are firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, hereinafter called "OWNER," in the sum of Dollars ($) to pay said sum as herein provided. We as Principal and Surety further promise and declare that these obligations shall bind our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors jointly and severally. This obligation is conditioned on the Principal submission of the accompanying bid, dated May 30, 2014forCITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 NOW, THEREFORE, (a)If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, (b)If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form specified, and the Principal shall then furnish a bond for the Principal's faithful performance of said Project, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the Project, as agreed to by the City's acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void. Otherwise this obligation shall remain in full force and effect, provided that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the amount of the obligation stated herein. By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bond, as provided in the Project specifications or as required by law. The Surety, for value received,hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall in no way be impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid or may execute such contract documents, and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such time extension. The Principal and the Surety hereto execute this bid bond this ________________ day of _____________________, A.D., 20___. (Seal) WitnessPrincipal By (Title) (Seal) Surety By Witness(Attorney-in-fact) Attach Power-of-Attorney BB-1 FORM OF AGREEMENT THIS AGREEMENT is made and entered into by and between the City of Iowa City, Iowa ("City"), and _________________________________________________ ("Contractor"). Whereas the City has prepared certain plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents th dated the 30day ofMay, 2014, for the CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014("Project"), and Whereas, said plans, specifications, proposal and bid documents accurately and fully describe the terms and conditions upon which the Contractor is willing to perform the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, IT IS AGREED: 1.The City hereby accepts the attached proposal and bid documents of the Contractor for the Project, and for the sums listed therein. 2.This Agreement consists of the following component parts which are incorporated herein by reference: a.Addenda Numbers _________________; b."General Conditions of the Contract for Construction” AIA DOC A201-2007, as amended; c.Plans; d.Specifications and Supplementary Conditions; e.Notice to Bidders; f.Note to Bidders; g.Performance and Payment Bond; h.Restriction on Non-Resident Bidding on Non-Federal-Aid Projects; i.Contract Compliance Program (Anti-Discrimination Requirements); j.Proposal and Bid Documents; and k.This Instrument. The above components are deemed complementary and should be read together. In the event of a discrepancy or inconsistency, the more specific provision shall prevail. AG-1 3.The names of subcontractors approved by City, together with quantities, unit “ATTACHMENT A.” prices, and extended dollar amounts, are shown as Payments are to be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions. 4.Project to be substantially complete by November 26, 2014and final completion date is December 19,2014. Liquidated damages are$1,117 per day. 5.Payments are to be made to the Contractor in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions. 6.The Project base bid submitted by form of proposal is in the amount of: ________________________________dollars and__________cents ($___________.00). th 7.DATED this 15day of July, 2014. [DATE BASED ON FORMAL COUNCIL MEETINGAWARDING CONTRACT BY RESOLUTION NUMBER________ ] CityContractor ____________ (Signature)(Signature) Matthew J. Hayek _________ (Mayor)(Printed name) ATTEST: (Title) City ClerkATTEST: Approved By: ______ City Attorney's Office(Title) (Company Official) AG-2 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND ___________________________________________________________________, as (insert the name and address or legal title of the Contractor) Principal, hereinafter called the Contractor and (insert the legal title of the Surety) , as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the City of Iowa City, Iowa, as obligee, hereinafter called the Owner, in the amount of Dollars ($________________________________) for the payment for which Contractor and Surety hereby bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally. WHEREAS, Contractor has, as of July 15, 2014, entered into a (date) written Agreement with Owner forCITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014; and WHEREAS, the Agreement requires execution of this Performance and Payment Bond, to be completed by Contractor, in accordance with plans and specifications prepared by Design Engineers, which Agreement is by reference made a part hereof, and the agreed-upon work is hereafter referred to as the Project. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION are such that, if Contractor shall promptly and faithfully perform said Agreement, then the obligation of this bond shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect until satisfactory completion of the Project. A.The Surety hereby waives notice of any alteration or extension of time made by the Owner. B.Whenever Contractor shall be, and is declared by Owner to be, in default under the Agreement, the Owner having performed Owner's obligations thereunder, the Surety may promptly remedy the default, or shall promptly: 1.Complete the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement, or 2.Obtain a bid or bids for submission to Owner for completing the Project in accordance with the terms and conditions of the Agreement; and upon determina- tion by Owner and Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, arrange for a contract between such bidder and Owner, and make available, as work progresses (even though there may be a default or a succession of defaults under the Agreement or PB-1 subsequent contracts of completion arranged under this paragraph), sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion, less the balance of the Contract Price, but not exceeding the amount set forth in the first paragraph hereof. The term "balance of the Contract Price," as used in this paragraph, shall mean the total amount payable by Owner to Contractor under the Agreement, together with any addenda and/or amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by Owner to Contractor. C.The Contractor and Contractor's Surety shall be obligated to keep the improvements covered by this bond in good repair for a period of one (1) years from the date of formal acceptance of the improvements by the Owner. D.No right of action shall accrue to or for the use of any person, corporation or third party other than the Owner named herein or the heirs, executors, administrators or successors of Owner. IT IS A FURTHER CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION that the Principal and Surety, in accordance with provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, shall pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal, including any of Principal's subcontrac- tors, all claims due them for labor performed or materials furnished in the performance of the Agreement for whose benefit this bond is given. The provisions of Chapter 573, Code of Iowa, are a part of this bond to the same extent as if it were expressly set out herein. SIGNED AND SEALED THIS _________ DAY OF _________________________, 20____. IN THE PRESENCE OF: (Principal) Witness(Title) (Surety) Witness(Title) (Street) (City, State, Zip) (Phone) PB-2 SECTION I- GENERAL POLICY STATEMENT 4. Prior to execution of the contract, the completed and signed Assurance of Compliance (located on pages CC-2 and CC-3) or other required material must be received and approved by the City. CC-1 SECTION II-ASSURANCE OF COMPLIANCE The following sets forth the minimum requirements of a satisfactory Equal Employment Opportunity PLEASE RETURN PAGES 2 THROUGH 3 OF THIS Program which will be reviewed for acceptability. SECTION TO THE CONTRACTING DEPARTMENT PRIOR TO THE EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT. With respect to the performance of this contract, the contractor, consultant or vendor agrees as follows: (For the purposes of these minimum requirements, "contracto· shall include consultants and vendors.) 1. The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment and will take affirmative efforts to ensure applicants and employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, creed, religion, national origin, sex, sexual orientation, gender identity, disability, marital status, and age. Such efforts shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, promotion, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. 2. The contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the contractor; state that it is an equal opportunity employer. Note: Contracts that are federally funded are subject to Executive Order No. 11246, as amended, and the regulations (see generally 29 U.S.C.§ 1608 et seq.) and relevant orders of the U.S. Secretary of Labor. The Secretary of Labor, and not the City, enforces said regulations and orders. Provide a copy of your written Equal Employment Opportunity policy statement. Where is this statement posted? What is the name, telephone number and address of your business' Equal Employment Opportunity Officer? Address Phone number The undersigned agrees to display, in conspicuous places at the work site, all posters required by federal and state law for the duration of the contract. NOTE: The City can provide assistance in obtaining the necessary posters. CC-2 How does your business currently inform applicants, employees, and recruitment sources (including unions) that you are an Equal Employment Opportunity employer? The above responses to questions 1 through 6 are true and correctly reflect our Equal Employment Opportunity policies. CC-3 SECTION Ill -SUGGESTED STEPS TO ASSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITIES 4. (g) (h) Improve hiring and selection procedures and use non-biased promotion, transfer and CC-4 Attached for your information is a copy of Section 2 3 1 of the Iowa City Code of Ordinances which prohibits certain discriminatory practices in employment as well as a sample policy. Please note that the protected characteristics include some not mandated for protection by Federal or State law. As a contractor, consultant or vendor doing business with the City of Iowa City you are required to abide by the provisions of the local ordinance in conjunction with your performance under a contract with the City. CC-5 SAMPLE: EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY POLICY To all employees of _ All employees are encouraged to refer minority and women applicants and applicants with disabilities for employment. CC-6 Sterling Codifiers, Inc. C. It shall be unlawful for any employer, employment agency, labor organization or the employees or members thereof to directly or indirectly advertise or in any other manner indicate or publicize that individuals are unwelcome, objectionable or not solicited for employment or membership because of age, color, creed, disability, gender identity, marital status, national origin, race, religion, sex or sexual orientation. (Ord. 95-3697, 11-7-1995) 2. agents or members and an employee or prospective employee concerning employment, pay or benefits to an employee or prospective employee in return for taking a test for the presence of the antibody to the human immunodeficiency virus, is prohibited. The prohibitions of this subsection do not apply if the state epidemiologist determines and the director of public health declares through the utilization of guidelines established by the center for disease control of the United States department of health and human services, that a person with a condition related to acquired immune deficiency syndrome poses a significant risk of transmission of the human immunodeficiency virus to other persons in a specific occupation. Sterling Codifiers, Inc. A state or federal program designed to benefit a specific age classification which serves a bona fide public purpose. (Ord. 94-3647, 11-8-1994) The employment on the basis of disability in those certain instances where presence of disability is a bona fide occupational qualification reasonably necessary to the normal operation of a particular business or enterprise. The bona fide occupational qualification shall be interpreted narrowly. (Ord. 03-4105, 12-16-2003) CC-8 GENERAL CONDITIONS “General Conditions of the Contract for Construction” AIA DOC A201-2007amended, shall apply except as amended in the Supplementary Conditions. CITY OF IOWA CITY SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS CITY OF IOWA CITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 INTRODUCTION A. The following supplements modify the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201-2007. Where a portion of the General Conditions is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Conditions, the unaltered portions of the General Conditions shall remain in effect. B. Terms used in these Supplementary Conditions will have meanings assigned to them in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings indicated below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof. C. Deletions from the AIA A201 are indicated as strike-out and additions to the AIA A201 are indicated as italic". D. The OWNER and CONTRACTOR may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Law or Regulations in respect to any dispute. Disputes shall be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings in a court of appropriate jurisdiction. Under no circumstances shall binding arbitration be required as to any dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Documents. E. Delete all references to mediation and arbitration in their entirety. 1.2 ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS Contract Documents A. Add the following paragraph 1.1.1.1 to read as follows: 1.1.1.1 Any reference within the Contract Documents of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor should be substituted with of the Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement). The Form of Agreement is listed as AG in the project manual. B. Change paragraph 1.1.3 to read as follows: 1.1.3 The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, tools, materials, equipment, transportation, services, taxes, insurance and all other services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. The Contractor shall provide all work and materials which any part of the Contract Documents require him to provide. C. Add the following paragraph 1.2.4: 1.2.4 Sections of Division 1 - General Requirements, govern the execution of all sections of the specifications. 1.3 ARTICLE 2 - OWNER A. Change paragraph 2.4 to read as follows: 2.4 If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting the SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC-1 Owner may deduct from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable entire cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for the Architect's additional services and expenses and heating, engineering, accounting, consulting services and attorneys' fees and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The Owner's actions pursuant to this Subparagraph shall not operate as a release of any obligation of a surety. 1.4 ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR A. Change paragraphs 3.2.2 to read as follows: 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. acity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damage resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such error, inconsistency or omission and knowingly failed to report it to the Architect. If the Contractor performs any construction activity knowing it involves involving a recognized error, inconsistency or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to the Architect, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such performance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable all costs for correction. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at any time without Contract Documents or, where required, approved Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples for such portion of the Work. B. Change paragraph 3.3.2 to read as follows: 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, vendors, materialmen and suppliers and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract with the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. C. Add the following 3.3.4: 3.3.4 Contractor shall maintain a qualified and responsible person available 24 hours per day, seven days per week to respond to emergencies which may occur after hours. Contractor shall provide to Owner and Architect the phone number and/or paging service of this individual. D. Change paragraph 3.4.1 to read as follows: 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, storage, parking and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. Should the Contract Documents require work to be performed after regular working hours or should the Contractor elect to perform work after regular hours, the additional cost of such work shall be borne by the Contractor. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC-2 E. Add the following paragraphs 3.4.4 through 3.4.6: 3.4.4 Whenever any provisions of the Contract conflict with any agreements or regulation of any kind in force among members of any trade association, unions or councils, which regulate what work shall be included in the work of particular trades, the Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements to reconcile any such conflict without delay or cost to the Owner and without recourse to the Architect or the Owner. 3.4.5 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitution products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in Section 01 60 00 - Post Bid Substitutions. 3.4.6 By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.4 above, the Contractor: .1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified. .2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified. .3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; and .4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in all respects. .5 will adhere to the contract schedule F. Change paragraphs 3.5 to read as follows: 3.5 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. G. Changeparagraph 3.6.1 to read as follows: The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certificate to purchase building materials, supplies, or equipment in the performance of the contract. The Contractor shall submit the information necessary for the certificates to be issued. All such information for said certificates shall be submitted to the City/Owner together in one submission. H. Change paragraph 3.7.2 to read as follows: 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply perform the Work in compliance with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work. I. Change paragraph 3.7.3 to read as follows: 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume full appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to the correction and expenses of correcting or replacing such Work. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC-3 J. Change paragraph 3.7.4 to read as follows: 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are 1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or 2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than the next business day 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase for performance of any part of the work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Archi recommendation, that party pay proceed as provided in Article 15. J. Change paragraph 3.11 to read as follows: 3.11 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner, one copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and one copy of all approved Shop Drawings, MSDS Sheets, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed. K. Change paragraph 3.13 to read as follows: 3.13 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. The Contractor acknowledges that the property on which the Project and Work are located may be occupied and in use by the Owner during the execution of the Work. The Contractor shall perform and coordinate its work in such a manner that the portions of the property occupied and in use will not be encumbered or the use interfered with or interrupted. L. Change paragraph 3.17 to read as follows: 3.17 The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect and the Owner in writing. M. Change paragraphs 3.18.1 to read as follows: 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify, defend and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including, but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused in whole or in part by intentional or negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC-4 may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18. Nothing in the foregoing Paragraph 3.18.1 is intended or shall be deemed to constitute an indemnification by the Contractor against the negligence of any of the parties to be otherwise indemnified pursuant to Paragraph 3.18.1. N. Change paragraph 3.18.2 to read as follows: 3.18.2 Contractor is not, and shall not be deemed to be, an agent or employee of the City of Iowa City, Iowa In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by . an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. 1.5 ARTICLE 4 - ARCHITECT A. Change paragraph 4.1.2 to read as follows: 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. B. Change paragraph 4.2.1 to read as follows: 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be the Owner's representative as provided herein during construction and until the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment to the Contractor on the Project. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. C. Change paragraph 4.2.3 to read as follows: 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner 1) known deviations from the Contract Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and 2) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect and the Owner will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work and the Owner in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. D. Change paragraphs 4.2.5 through 4.2.6 to read as follows: 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify recommend to the Owner the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementation of the intent of the Contract Documents, the Architect will have authority to recommend to the Owner to require additional inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC-5 performing portions of the Work. E. Change paragraphs 4.2.10 through 4.2.12 to read as follows: 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and make recommendations to the Owner regarding decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which recommendations required of the Architect shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then the Architect shall furnish such recommendations within such reasonable time after the request is made that allow sufficient time in the professional judgment of the Architect for review. 4.2.12 Interpretations and recommendations decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and recommendations decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or recommendations decisions rendered in good faith. 1.6 ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS A. Delete paragraph 5.2.1 and add the following: 5.2.1 The CONTRACTOR shall provide, within 24 hours of the bid opening, a list those persons, firms, companies or other parties to whom it proposes/intends to enter into a subcontract regarding this project as required on the Bid Form and the Agreement. 1. If no minority business enterprises (MBE) are utilized, the CONTRACTOR shall furnish documentation of all efforts to recruit MBE's. B. Change paragraph 5.3 to read as follows: 5.3 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. All warranties provided by the Subcontractors, including all express and implied warranties in the Contract Documents and the agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors and all warranties provided by law, shall run to and be for the benefit of the Owner, and the Owner shall have a direct right of action against the Subcontractors for any breach of said warranties. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC-6 1.7 ARTICLE 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS A. Delete paragraph 6.1.4 in its entirety. B. Change paragraph 6.2.4 to read as follows: 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 1.8 ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Change paragraph 7.2.1 to read as follows: 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Contractor and approved by the Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: B. Add paragraph 7.2.2 as follows: 7.2.2 A Change Order is conclusively presumed to include all adjustments in Contract Time and Contract Sum necessary to complete the change to the Work and related parts of the Work. C. Add paragraph 7.2.3 as follows: 7.2.3 In all Change Orders or Construction Change Directives, the allowance for Overhead and profit to be included in the total cost to the Owner shall not exceed the following amounts: .1 For the Contractor, for any Work performed directly by the Contractor's employees, not including oversight of such work performed by subcontractor, fifteen percent (15%) of the cost. .2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by his Subcontractor, ten percent (10%) of the amount due the Subcontractor. .3 For each Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor involved, for any Work performed by such contractor's own forces, fifteen percent (15%) of the cost. .4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by his Sub-subcontractors, five percent (5%) of the amount due the Sub-subcontractor. .5 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. In no case will a change involving over $200.00 be approved without such itemization. .6 Unless otherwise agreed, costs to which overhead and profit are to be applied shall be those costs listed in Subparagraph 7.3.6. 1.9 ARTICLE 8 - TIME A. Change paragraph 8.2.3 to read as follows: 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract time. The Contractor shall bear all costs for overtime and all additional expense which may arise in order to achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. B. Add paragraph 8.2.4 to read as follows: 8.2.4 If, upon the recommendation of the Architect, it becomes necessary at times during construction for the Owner to accelerate the work, each Contractor or subcontractor when ordered and directed by the Owner, shall cease work at any point and shall transfer his men to such points and execute such portion of his work as may be required to SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC-7 enable others to properly engage in and carry on their work. C. Change paragraph 8.3.1 to read as follows: 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by delay authorized by the Owner pending arbitration, or by other causes which the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Owner, with the advice of the Architect, may determine. Such delays shall not be a basis for damages. An extension of the Contract Time is the Contractor's sole remedy for such delay. D. Delete paragraph 8.3.3 in its entirety. E. Add paragraph 8.4 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES to read as follows: Since the actual monetary value of damages sustained by the Owner as a result of delayed completion of the Work is extremely difficult or impractical to assess, the Owner and Contractor agree as follows: 1. Final compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents: The Contractor shall pay as liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, the sum of amount as listed in the Notice to Bidders (or Instruction to Bidders) Final adjustments of the Contract Time as provided for in the Contract Documents. s 2. The Owner shall give written notice to the Contractor of intent to assess liquidated damages pursuant to provisions of this Article. Calculation of the amount of liquidated damages shall commence on the date the Owner notifies the Contractor of this intent. 3. Liquidated damages assessed in accordance with these provisions are exclusive of other monetary damages to which the Owner may be entitled as a direct result with requirements of the Contract Documents. These liquidated damages are not 4. Partial performance of the Work of this Contract shall not relieve the Contractor from liability for liquidated damages. 5. Final Completion Certificate for the Work of the Contract. 6. Notwithstanding anything in the Contract Documents to the contrary, amounts assessed to the Contractor as liquidated damages may be deducted by the Owner from any money payable to the Contractor pursuant to this Contract. The Owner shall notify the Contractor in writing of a claim for liquidated damages prior to the date the Owner deducts such sum from money payable to the Contractor. 1.10 ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION A. Add the following paragraph 9.3.1.3. .3 The first payment application shall be accompanied by Contractor's partial waiver of SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC-8 lien only, for the full amount of the payment. Each subsequent monthly payment application shall be accompanied by the Contractor's partial waiver and by the partial waivers of Subcontractors and Suppliers who were included in the immediately preceding payment application to the extent of that payment. Application for final payment shall be accompanied by final waivers of lien from the Contractor, Subcontractor and Suppliers who have not previously furnished such final waivers. B. Change paragraph 9.4.1 to read as follows: 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. Nothing herein shall be construed as requiring the Architect to reduce the retainage to be applied to payment applications. All certifications and payments, including those pursuant to a pending claim, shall be tentative and conditional and it shall not be necessary for the Architect to make any statement to this effect. C. Add paragraph 9.4.2.1: 9.4.2.1 The Architect's determination as to the issuance of or withholding of or the amount of payment reflected on Certificates of Payment shall subject the Architect to no liability whatsoever to the Owner, Contractor, Surety, or any other person. D. Change paragraph 9.6.1 to read as follows: 9.6.1 The Owner shall make partial payments to the Contractor within 30 days after the Owner has received a Certificate for Payment from the Architect. To insure proper performance of the Contract, the Owner will retain 5% of each payment amount or such larger amount as will insure that there always remains a sufficient balance to complete the work, such retainage to be held until Final Acceptance of Work and shall so notify the Architect. Payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. E. Change paragraph 9.8.4 to read as follows: When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work, and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. F. Add paragraph 9.10.6: 9.10.6 Notwithstanding any provision to the contrary in this Contract, final payment of the retainage due the Contractor will be made not earlier than 31 days from the final acceptance of the work by the Owner, subject to the conditions and in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 573 of the Code of Iowa (2009), as amended. G. Add paragraph 9.10.7: 9.10.7 Warranties required by the Contract Documents, including those stated in the performance and payment bond, shall commence on the date of final, formal acceptance of the work by the City. 1.11 ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Add paragraph 10.1.1: 1. The Contractor will provide Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for all hazardous chemicals or materials that will be at the job site. The Material Safety Data Sheets will be SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC-9 submitted to the Owner prior to the start of construction and supplemented as necessary throughout the project. This data is being provided for informational purposes only and does not relieve the contractor of any obligations for compliance with applicable OSHA and State laws regarding hazardous chemicals and right-to-know. B. Change paragraph 10.2.4 to read as follows: 1. When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for the execution of the Work, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice and shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. C. Add paragraph 10.2.9: 10.2.9 When required by law or for the safety of the Work, the Contractor shall shore up, brace, underpin and protect foundations and other portions of existing structures which are in any way affected by the Work. The Contractor, before commencement of any part of the Work, shall give any notices required to be given to adjoining landowners or other parties. The Owner shall be notified once these notices have been served and before the work is performed. 1.12 ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS A. Change paragraph 11.1.1.5 to read as follows: .5 claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including explosion, collapse and damage to underground utilities and loss of use resulting therefrom; B. Change paragraph 11.1.2 to read as follows: 11.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverage whether shall be written on an occurrence or claims-made basis and shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment, completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract Documents. C. Change paragraph 11.1.3 to read as follows: 11.1.3 Certificates of Insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. The name, address and phone number of the insurance company and agent must accompany the certificate. The liability limits required hereunder must apply to this Project only. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to An additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted upon final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness. D. Delete paragraph 11.1.4 in its entirety and add the following paragraphs 11.1.4 through 11.1.14: 11.1.4Any policy or policies of insurance purchased by the Contractor to satisfy his/her responsibilities under this contract shall include contractual liability coverage, and shall be in the following type and minimum amounts: SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC-10 Type of Coverage Aggregate Comprehensive General Liability Each Occurrence Bodily Injury & Property Damage* $1,000,000 $2,000,000 Combined Single Limit Automobile Liability Bodily Injury & Property Damage $1,000,000 Excess Liability $1,000,000 $1,000,000 Each Accident $500,000 Each Employee $500,000 Policy Limit $500,000 Professional Liability (if applicable) $1,000,000 $1,000,000 red by Chapter 85, Code of Iowa. Property Damage liability insurance must provide explosion, collapse and underground coverage. Comprehensive General Liability using Insurance Services Office CG0001 or equivalent, shall include Contractual, Premises & Operations, Products & Completed Operations, Independent Contractors, Personal & Advertising Injury coverages, and Aggregate Limits of Insurance (Per Project) endorsement. Automobile Liability shall include all owned, non-owned and hired autos and also coverage for Contractual Liability. Excess Liability shall provide no less than following form coverage to the primary underlying policies. Workers Compensation shall include the Alternative Employer and Waiver of Subrogation endorsements in favor of the Owner. Professional Liability, if applicable: Tthe Contractor shall procure and maintain, during the life of this Agreement, Professional Errors and Omissions Liability Insurance. The Contractor will notify the Owner if claims made erode the policy limits below those required above. All liability policies above, except for Workers Compensation and Professional Liability, shall include 11.1.5 The City requires that the Contractor's Insurance carrier be A rated or better by A.M. Best. In addition, the Contractor shall be required to comply with the following provisions with respect to insurance coverage: 11.1.6 The entire amount of Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits, identified in the policy and in the Certificate of Insurance, must, under the policy, be available to pay damages for which the insured Contractor becomes liable, or for which the insured assumes liability under the indemnity agreement herein contained, and such coverage amount shall not be subject to reduction or set off by virtue of investigation or defense costs incurred by Contractor's insurer. 11.1.7 The entire amount of the Contractor's liability insurance policy coverage limits shall be payable by the Contractor's insurer, with no deductible to be paid by, or self-insured retention to be attributed to, the Contractor unless this requirement is waived by the City. Contractor's Certificate of Insurance must set forth the nature and amount of any such deductible or self-insured retention. 11.1.8 If Contractor's liability insurance coverage is subject to any special exclusions or SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC-11 limitations not common to the type of coverage being provided, such exclusions or limitations shall be noted on the Certificate of Insurance and copies of such shall be attached thereto. 11.1.9 The Contractor shall include the City as additional insured on all policies except workers compensation. The Contractor shall include the Owner (City of Iowa City, including its employees, agents and assigns) as additional insured on all policies, except and, furthermore, shall not be contributing with any other insurance or similar protection available to the Owner, whether such available protection be primary, contributing or excess. Owner shall be an Additional Insured with repect to all required aforementioned coverages, which shall be stated on all Certificates of Insurance. Such Certificates shall also state that the Governmental Immunities Endorsement (see attached) apply and said endorsements shall be attached thereto. The Contractor shall require any of its agents and subcontractors who perform work and/or services pursuant to the provisions of this Agreement to purchase and maintain the same types of insurance as are required of the Contractor. 11.1.10 The City prefers that Contractor provide it with "occurrence form" liability insurance coverage. If Contractor can only provide "claims-made" insurance coverage, then the Contractor must comply with the following requirements: A. If the Contractor changes insurance carriers, or if Contractor's insurance coverage is canceled, during the contract period or within two years after City's acceptance of the work, Contractor agrees to immediately notify the City of such event. B. If Contractor's insurance is canceled or is allowed to lapse during said period, Contractor shall be required to obtain replacement insurance coverage to fulfill its obligation hereunder. C. If, during said period, Contractor voluntarily changes insurance carriers or is required to obtain replacement coverage from another carrier, Contractor shall either (1) purchase "tail" coverage from its first carrier effective for a minimum of two years after City Council acceptance of the work, or (2) purchase "prior acts" insurance coverage from its new carrier, covering prior acts during the period of this Contract from and after its inception. D. "Tail" or "prior acts" coverage so provided shall have the same coverage, with the same limits, as the insurance specified in this Contract, and shall not be subject to any further limitations or exclusions, or have a higher deductible or self-insured retention than the insurance which it replaces 11.1.11 The City reserves the right to waive any of the insurance requirements herein provided. The City also reserves the right to reject Contractor's insurance if not in compliance with the requirements herein provided, and on that basis to either award the contract to the next low bidder, or declare a default and seek specific performance or termination, as the case may be. 11.1.12 In the event that any of the policies of insurance or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, or in the event that Contractor incurs liability losses, either due to activities under this Contract, or due to other activities not under this Contract but covered by the same insurance, and SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC-12 such losses exhaust the aggregate limits of Contractor's liability insurance, then in that event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 11.1.13 In the event that any of the policies or insurance coverage identified on Contractor's Certificate of Insurance are canceled or modified, then in that event the City may in its discretion either suspend Contractor's operations or activities under this Contract, or terminate this Contract, and withhold payment for work performed on the Contract. 11.1.14 Contractor shall be responsible for any deductible amounts; including but . E. Delete paragraphs 11.3 in its entirety and add paragraphs 11.3 as follows: 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.3.1 OWNER shall purchase and maintain property insurance upon the Work at the Site in the amount of the full replacement cost thereof (subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). This insurance shall: .1 include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, Engineering Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, and other consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an additional insured; .2 be written on a Builder's Risk "all-risk" or open peril or special causes of loss policy form that shall at least include insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, false work, and materials and equipment in transit, and shall insure against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire, lightning, extended coverage, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief, earthquake, collapse, debris removal, water damage, and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by the Supplementary Conditions; .3 include expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property; .4 include $100,000 for materials and equipment stored at the Site or at another location that was agreed to in writing by OWNER prior to being incorporated in the Work, provided that such materials and equipment have been included in an Application for Payment recommended by OWNER; .5 allow for partial utilization of the Work by OWNER; .6 include testing and startup; and .7 be maintained in effect until final payment is made. .8 Such coverage shall not include coverage for loses or damage caused by the negligent acts or omissions of Contractor or Subcontractors, or for damage to material or equipment while under the control of or stored by Contractor prior to installation or prior to inclusion of such material or equipment in construction. Contractor shall maintain appropriate insurance for such risks or occurrences 11.3.2 OWNER shall purchase and maintain such boiler and machinery insurance which SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC-13 shall specifically cover such insured objects or additional property insurance as may be required by Laws and Regulations which will include the interests of OWNER, CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, OWNER's Engineering Consultants, and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, each of whom is deemed to have an insurable interest and shall be listed as an insured or additional insured. 11.3.3 All the policies of insurance (and the certificates or other evidence thereof) required to be purchased and maintained in accordance with paragraph 5.06 will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to OWNER and CONTRACTOR and to each other additional insured to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued and will contain waiver provisions. 11.3.5 If CONTRACTOR requests in writing that other special insurance be included in the property insurance policies provided under paragraph 5.06, OWNER shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof will be charged to CONTRACTOR by appropriate Change Order or Written Amendment. Prior to commencement of the Work at the Site, OWNER shall in writing advise CONTRACTOR whether or not such other insurance has been procured by OWNER. F. Delete section 11.4 in its entirety and add paragraph 11.4 to read as follows: 11.4.1 The Contractor shall furnish a Performance Bond and Labor and Material Payment Bond from a surety using the form included in the Contract Documents, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price. Cost of such Bonds shall be included in the base bid. Each alternative bid shall include the additional Bond cost. Contractor shall deliver the required Bonds to the Owner prior to the signing of the Agreement. .1 The Performance, Labor and Material Bond shall be executed in conformity with the American Institute of Architect's Document A-312 (1984 Edition), with coverage provided by a surety having a financial rating from A.M. Best of A, VII or higher. .2 Whenever the Contractor shall be and is declared by the Owner to be in default under the Contract, the Surety and Contractor are each responsible to make full payment to the Owner for any and all additional services of the Architect as defined in the Owner/Architect Agreement which are required as a result of the Contractor's default and in protecting the Owner's right under the agreement with the Contractor to remedy the Contractor's default or honor the terms of the Performance Bond. .3 These Bonds shall be maintained by the Contractor and shall remain in full force and effect until final acceptance of the Work by the Owner. The Contractor agrees and will cause the Surety to agree to be bound by each and every provision of all the Contract Documents. .4 The Surety shall give written notice to Owner, within seven (7) days after receipt of a declaration of default, of the Surety's election either to remedy the default or defaults promptly or to perform the work promptly or to pay to Owner the penal sum of the bond, time being of the essence. In said notice of election, the Surety shall indicate the date on which the remedy or performance will commence, and it shall then be the duty of the Surety to give prompt notice in writing to Owner immediately upon completion of (a) the remedy and/or correction of each default, (b) the remedy and/or correction of each omitted item of work, (c) the furnishing of each omitted item of work, and (d) the performance of the work. The Surety shall not assert solvency of its Principal or its Principal's denial of default as justification for its failure to promptly remedy the default or defaults or perform the work. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC-14 .5 The Principal and Surety further agree as part of this obligation to pay all such damages of any kind to person or property that may result from a failure in any respect to perform and complete the Work including, but not limited to, all repair and replacement costs necessary to rectify construction error, architectural and engineering costs and fees, all consultant fees, all testing and laboratory fees, and all legal fees and litigation costs incurred by the Owner. .6 The Surety agrees that other than as is provided in the Bond it may not demand of the Owner that the Owner shall (a) perform any thing or act, (b) give any notice, (c) furnish any clerical assistance, (d) render any service, (e) furnish any papers or documents, or (f) take any other action of any nature or description which is not required of the Owner to be done under the Contract Documents. 11.4.2 Surety shall be satisfactory to the Owner and shall be authorized to do business in the state of Iowa. 1.13 ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A. Change paragraph 13.1 to read as follows: 13.1 The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Iowa of the place where the Project is located except that, if the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4. B. Change paragraph 13.3.1 to read as follows: 13.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual, to a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. C. Change paragraph 13.5.1 to read as follows: 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect and Owner timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect and Owner may observe such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of 1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded and 2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor. Copies of all reports, data and other documents related to tests, inspections and approvals shall be provided to the Architect as soon as practicable. D. Delete paragraphs 13.7. E. Add the following Section 13.8: 13.8 The Contractor shall maintain policies of employment as follows: .1 The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance. The Contractor shall take affirmative action to insure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance. Such action shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC-15 layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices setting forth the policies of non-discrimination. .2 The Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors shall, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by them or on their behalf, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, religion, color, sex, age, disability or national origin or otherwise as may be required by local or state ordinance F. Add the following Section 13.9: 13.9 The Contractor shall maintain CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM (ANTI DISCRIMINATION REQUIREMENTS) for all contracts of $25,000 or more, the Contractor shall abide by the requirements of the City's Contract Compliance Program, which is included with these Specifications beginning on page CC-1. 1.14 ARTICLE 14 - TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT A. Add the following paragraph 14.2.1.5: .5 fails or refuses to provide insurance or proof of insurance as required by the Contract Documents. B. Change paragraph 14.2.4 to read as follows: 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. The Contractor shall bear all testing, engineering, accounting, and legal expenses made necessary as a result of termination of the Contract. 1.15 ARTICLE 15- CLAIMS AND DISPUTES A. Change paragraphs 15.1.1 through 15.1.3 to read as follows: 15.1.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, or other similar relief with respect to the administration terms of the Contract during the performance of the Work. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. Nothing in this Article is intended to limit claims by the Owner related to the performance of or quality of the Work. 15.1.2 Notice of Claims. Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. An additional Claim relating to the same subject matter made after the initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered and is deemed waived by the Contractor. unless submitted in a timely manner. 15.1.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC-16 payments for sums not in dispute in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker. B. Change paragraph 15.2.5 to read as follows: 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the claim. This initial decision shall 1) be in writing, 2) state the reasons therefore, and 3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The approval or rejection of a Claim by the initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their disputes through mediation, to binding dispute resolution arbitration. C. Delete paragraphs 15.2.6 and 15.2.6.1 in their entirety. D. Delete Section 15.3 MEDIATION in its entirety. E. Delete Section 15.4 ARBITRATION in its entirety. F. Add the following paragraph 15.5 to read as follows: 15.5 The Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute. Disputes shall be resolved by legal or equitable proceedings in a court of appropriate jurisdiction. Under no circumstances shall binding arbitration be required as . to any dispute arising between the parties or under the Contract Documents END OF DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS DOCUMENT SC-17 Division 01 General Requirements 01 Division CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 011000-SUMMARY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02SUMMARY A.This Section includes the following: 1.Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2.Type of the Contract. 3.Work under other contracts. 4.Use of premises. 5.Owner's occupancy requirements. 6.Work restrictions. 7.Specification formats and conventions. B.Related Sections include the following: 1.Division01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities. 1.03WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A.Project Identification: City Hall North CourtHVAC Replacement Project 2014 1.Project Location: City Hall, 410 E. Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa B.Owner: City of Iowa City 1.Owner's Representative: Kumi Morris, 410 E. Washington Street, Iowa City, Iowa C.Architect/ Design Professional:Design Engineers 1.Project Engineer: Tim Lentz, 8801 Prairie View Lane SW Suite 200, Cedar Rapids, Iowa 319.841.1944 D.The Work consists of the following: 1.The Work includes replacement of oneexisting packaged DX rooftop HVAC unitserving the lower, first, and second levelsof the North Court portion of City Hall and installation of a mini-split cooling unit serving the police station IT room. 1.04TYPE OF CONTRACT A.Project will be constructed under a single prime contract. 1.05WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A.General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts. SUMMARY 011000-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B.Preceding Work: Owner will awardseparate contract(s) for the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins. 1.Temperature Controls System Integration:A separate contract will beawarded to provide some temperature controls integration to bring the various systems at City Hall to be viewed through an open source platform such as Tridium Niagara. 1.06USE OF PREMISES A.General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits. B.Use of Site: Limit use of premises to areasindicatedwith work to be performed. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1.Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site. 2.Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, apparatus bay apron, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. a.Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b.Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. C.Use of Existing Building: Maintain existingbuilding in a weathertight condition throughout construction period. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during construction period. 1.07OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A.Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existingbuilding during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated. 1.Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2.Provide not less than 72hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations. B.Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1.Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied before Owner occupancy. 2.Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy. 3.Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building. 4.On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building. SUMMARY 011000-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.08WORK RESTRICTIONS A.On-Site Work Hours: Work may be performed any hour of the day.Building is occupied between 8am and 5pm.At contractor's option, work may be performed outside normal business hours. Noisy work shall be coordinated with Owner's Representative such that interruption to occupants is minimized. B.Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1.Notify Owner's Representativenot less than twodays in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2.Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner'swritten permission. 1.09SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A.Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 50- division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 1.Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross- referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. 2.Division01: Sections in Division01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications. B.Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1.Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates. 2.Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a.The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 1.10MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS A.Contractor shall be responsible for all permits required by City. B.Contractor shall be responsible for permitting temporary use of right of way to close of street access as required by the work (refer to form attached to the end of this section). C.Contractor to pay all parking fees as required as no contractor parking is available. D.Contractor to fill out all prescriptive rebate forms from the utility company (MidAmerican) and coordinate rebate checks from utility company to Owner. SUMMARY 011000-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION011000 SUMMARY 011000-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 012600-CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02SUMMARY A.This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. 1.03MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A.Design Professional will issuesupplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on"Design Professional's Instruction to Contractor"(ITC) form. 1.04PROPOSAL REQUESTS A.Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Design Professionalwill issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1.Proposal Requests issued by Design Professionalare for information only. Do not consider theminstructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2.Within14 daysafter receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a.Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b.Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c.Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d.Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. B.Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Design Professional. 1.Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2.Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. 3.Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4.Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 5.Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 1.05CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A.On Owner's approval ofa Proposal Request, Design Professionalwill issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIADocumentG701. 1.06CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A.Construction Change Directive: Design Professionalmay issue a Construction Change Directive on AIADocumentG714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1.Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designatesmethod to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B.Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the ConstructionChange Directive. 1.After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 012900-PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02SUMMARY A.This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 1.03DEFINITIONS A.Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.04SCHEDULE OF VALUES A.Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule 1.Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a.Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. 2.Submit the Schedule of Values to Design Professionalat earliest possible date but no later than sevendays before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3.Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment. B.Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1.Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a.Project name and location. b.Name of Design Professional. c.Design Professional's project number. d.Contractor's name and address. e.Date of submittal. 2.Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a.Related Specification Section or Division. b.Description of the Work. c.Name of subcontractor. d.Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e.Name of supplier. f.Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 g.Dollar value. 1)Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 3.Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide severalline items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. 4.Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5.Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. a.Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing. 6.Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 7.Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 8.Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a.Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 9.Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.05APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A.Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Design Professionaland paid for by Owner. 1.Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B.Payment Application Times: Payments will be made as labor performed and material delivered is certified approximately monthly. Payments are made within three weeks of approved payment applications. C.Payment Application Forms: Use AIADocumentG702 and AIADocumentG703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 D.Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Design Professionalwill return incomplete applications without action. 1.Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2.Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 3 E.Transmittal: Submit signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Design Professionalby a method ensuring receiptwithin 24 hours.One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1.Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. F.Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1.Submit partial waivers on each item foramount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2.When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3.Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4.Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5.Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner. G.Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1.List of subcontractors. 2.Schedule of Values. 3.Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4.Schedule of unit prices, if applicable. 5.Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 6.List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7.Copies of building permits. 8.Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 9.Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 10.Performance and payment bonds. 11.Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. H.Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1.Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2.This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 I.Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1.Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2.Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3.Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4.AIADocumentG706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5.AIADocumentG706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6.AIADocumentG707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7.Evidence that claims have been settled. 8.Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9.Final, liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 013100-PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02SUMMARY A.This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1.Coordination Drawings. 2.Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3.Project meetings. 4.Requests for Interpretation (RFIs). B.Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor. C.Related Sections include the following: 1.Division01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout ofthe Contract. 1.03DEFINITIONS A.RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1.04COORDINATION A.Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations,included in different Sectionsthat depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. B.Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2.Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3.Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4.Where availabilityof space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1.Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. D.Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1.Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3.Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4.Delivery and processing of submittals. 5.Progress meetings. 6.Preinstallation conferences. 7.Project closeout activities. 8.Startup and adjustment of systems. 9.Project closeout activities. E.Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 1.Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.05SUBMITTALS A.Key Personnel Names: Within 10days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their dutiesand responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1.Post copies oflist in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.06ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A.General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 1.Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors. 1.07PROJECT MEETINGS A.General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1.Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Design Professionalof scheduled meeting dates and times. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2.Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda.Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3.Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Design Professional, within 3days of the meeting. B.Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Ownerand Design Professional, but no later than 15days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenientlocation. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1.Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Design Professional, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and otherconcerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2.Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a.Tentative construction schedule. b.Phasing. c.Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d.Designation of key personnel and their duties. e.Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f.Procedures for RFIs. g.Procedures for testing and inspecting. h.Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i.Distribution of the Contract Documents. j.Submittal procedures. k.Preparation of Record Documents. l.Use of the premisesand existing building. m.Work restrictions. n.Owner's occupancy requirements. o.Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p.Construction waste management and recycling. q.Parking availability. r.Office, work, and storage areas. s.Equipment deliveries and priorities. t.First aid. u.Security. v.Progress cleaning. w.Working hours. 3.Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes. C.Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1.Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Design ProfessionalandOwnerof scheduled meeting dates. 2.Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a.The Contract Documents. b.Options. c.Related RFIs. d.Related Change Orders. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 e.Purchases. f.Deliveries. g.Submittals. h.Review of mockups. i.Possible conflicts. j.Compatibility problems. k.Time schedules. l.Weather limitations. m.Manufacturer's written recommendations. n.Warranty requirements. o.Compatibility of materials. p.Acceptability of substrates. q.Temporary facilities and controls. r.Space and access limitations. s.Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t.Testing and inspecting requirements. u.Installation procedures. v.Coordination with other work. w.Required performance results. x.Protection of adjacent work. y.Protection of construction and personnel. 3.Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4.Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. 5.Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D.Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at biweeklyintervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1.Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Design Professional, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2.Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a.Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1)Review schedule for next period. b.Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1)Interface requirements. 2)Sequence of operations. 3)Status of submittals. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 4)Deliveries. 5)Off-site fabrication. 6)Access. 7)Site utilization. 8)Temporary facilities and controls. 9)Work hours. 10)Hazards and risks. 11)Progress cleaning. 12)Quality and work standards. 13)Status of correction of deficient items. 14)Field observations. 15)RFIs. 16)Status of proposal requests. 17)Pending changes. 18)Status of Change Orders. 19)Pending claims and disputes. 20)Documentation of information for payment requests. 3.Minutes: Recordthe meeting minutes. 4.Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. a.Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. 1.08REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs) A.Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1.RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response. 2.Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B.Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following: 1.Project name. 2.Date. 3.Name of Contractor. 4.Name of DesignProfessional. 5.RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6.Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7.Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8.Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9.Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10.Contractor's signature. 11.Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a.Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments. PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-5 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above. 1.Attachments shall be electronic files in PDF format. D.Design Professional's Action: Design Professionalwill review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow 7working days for Design Professional's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1.The following RFIs will be returned without action: a.Requests for approval of submittals. b.Requests for approval of substitutions. c.Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d.Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e.Requests for interpretation of Design Professional's actionson submittals. f.Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors. 2.Design Professional's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Design Professional's time for response will start again. 3.Design Professional's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures." a.If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Design Professionalin writing within 10days of receipt of the RFI response. E.On receipt of Design Professional's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Design Professional7days if Contractor disagrees with response. F.RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log bi-weekly.Include the following: 1.Project name. 2.Name and address of Contractor. 3.Name and address of Design Professional. 4.RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5.RFI description. 6.Date the RFI was submitted. 7.Date Design Professional's response was received. 8.Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9.Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. PART 2 -PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100-6 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 013300-SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02SUMMARY A.This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. 1.03SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A.Samples, shop drawings and/or product data shall be submitted to and approved by the Design Professional prior tofabrication. No work shall commence in connection with each of the various items for which submittals are required until all related submittals have been approved by the Design Professional. B.Transmiteach submittal with transmittal letter indicating: date, project title, project number, contractor's name and address and pertinent Specification Section number. Two (2) copies of all transmittal letters shall to be sent to the Construction Manager’s attention at the time of each submission. C.Sequentially number the transmittal forms. Identify re-submittals with original number and an alphabetic suffix. D.Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. E.Identify variations from Contract Documents and product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. F.Provide space for Contractor and Design Professional review stamps. G.Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous submittal. H.Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. PRODUCTS 2.01SHOP DRAWINGS A.The Contractor shall submit for approval to the Design Professional, equipment lists and Shop Drawings, as expediently as possible. Failure of the Contractor to submit Shop Drawings in a timely manner will result in the Owner holding back Contractor payments. B.The material and equipment lists shall be submitted and approved before any material or equipment is purchased and shall be corrected to as-built conditions before the completion of the project. SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.The Contractor shall submit to the Design Professional electronic (PDF) copy of all required Shop Drawings, material and equipment lists for the Design Professional’s and the Owner’s sole use. The Contractor shall submit additional copies required for his own use. Electronic copy will be reviewed by the Design Professional and returned to the Contractor marked accordingly. 1)The Contractor shall identify each submittal item with the following: (a)Project Title and Location (b)ProjectNumber (c)Supplier’s Name (d)Manufacturer’s Name (e)Contract Specification Section and Article Number (f)Contract Drawing Number 2)Reference the accompanying Shop Drawing and Submittal Log at the end of this sec- tion for required submittal information. 3)The Contractor shall list the lead time for equipment on the transmittal for the respec- tive submittal. D.Refer to Division 23 and 26 General Provision sections for required shop drawing submittals. E.In no instance shallthe Contract Drawings be reproduced for shop drawing submittals. END OF SECTION013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVACREPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 015000-TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: A.Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS: A.Definitions: Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are specified in this section, as extensions of provisions in General Conditions and other contract documents. These requirements have been included for special purposes as indicated. Nothing in this section is intended to limit types and amounts of temporary work required, and no omission from this section will be recognized as indication by Engineer that such temporary activity is not required for successful completion of the work and compliance with requirements of contract documents. Provisions of this section are applicable to, but not by way of limitation, utility services, construction facilities, security/protection provisions, and support facilities. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. General: In addition to compliance with governing regulations and rules/ recommendations of franchised utility companies, comply with specific requirements indicated and with applicable local industry standards for construction work. B.ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI A10-Series Standards on construction safety, including A10.3, A10.4, A10.5, A10.6, A10.7, A10.8, A10.10, A10.11, A10.12, A10.13, A10.14, A10.15, A10.17, A10.18, A10.20, and A10.22. C.NFPA Code: Comply with NFPA Code 241 "Building Construction and Demolition Operations". 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS: A. General: Establish and initiate use of each temporary facility at time first reasonably required for proper performance of the work. Terminate use and remove facilities at earliest reasonable time, when no longer needed or when permanent facilities have, with authorized use, replaced the need. B.Conditions of Use: Install, operate, maintain and protecttemporary facilities in a manner and at locations which will be safe, non-hazardous, sanitary and protective of persons and property, and free of deleterious effects. PARTS 2 AND 3 -PRODUCTS AND EXECUTION 2.01 TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES: A.The typesof services required include, but not by way of limitation, water, sewerage, surface drainage, electrical power and telephones. Where possible and reasonable, connect to existing or franchised utilities for required services: and comply with service companies' recommendations on materials and methods, or engage service companies to install services. Locate and relocate services (as necessary) to minimize interference with construction operations. B.Potable Water: Water connection to Owner's existing potable water system is permitted, if not abused. Location of connections and shutdown must be approved in advance by Owner. Piping, hose, etc. for distribution is Contractor's cost; Owner will bear cost of water. TEMPORARY FACILITIES 015000-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVACREPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.Non-potable Water: Where non-potablewater is used, mark each outlet with adequate health- hazard warning signs. D.Temporary Power: Connection to Owner's existing service and/or outlets is permitted, if not abused. Provide service with ground-fault circuit interrupter features, activated frame each circuit of 20-amp or less rating if required. Materials and cost of distribution is Contractor's cost; Owner will bear cost of power. 2.02 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES A.The types of temporary construction facilities required include,but not by way of limitation, water distribution, drainage, dewatering equipment, enclosure of work, heat, ventilation, electrical power distribution, lighting, hoisting facilities, stairs and ladders. Provide facilities reasonably required to perform construction operations properly and adequately. B.Enclosure: Provide temporary enclosure where indicated and where reasonably required to ensure dust protection of interior space from construction activities, adequate workmanship and protection from weather and unsatisfactory ambient conditions for the work, including enclosures where temporary heat is used or dust protection is needed. Provide fire-retardant treated lumber and plywood. Provide tarpaulins with UL label and flame spread of 15 or less; provide translucent type (nylon reinforced polyethylene) where daylighting of enclosed space would be beneficial for workmanship, and reduce use of temporary lighting. C.Lighting: Provide sufficient temporary lighting to ensure proper workmanship everywhere; by combined use of daylight, general lighting, and portable plug-in task lighting. Provide general lighting with local switching which will enable energy conservation during periods of varying activity (work-in-progress, traffic only, security check, lock-up, etc). Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. D.Access Provisions: Provide hoisting equipment, ladders and similar temporary access elements as reasonably required to perform the work and facilitate its inspection during installation. Comply with reasonable requests of governing authorities performing inspections. On permanent stairs, corridors and building interiors available for access during construction, cover finished surfaces with sufficient protection to ensurefreedom from damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion. 1.Access routes through occupied portions of the building will require approval of the Owner. 2.03 SECURITY/PROTECTION PROVISIONS: A.The types of temporary security and protection provisions required include, but not by way of limitation, separation walls, passage ways, fire protection, barricades, warning signs/lights, site enclosure fence, sidewalk bridges, building enclosure/lockup, personnel security program (theft prevention), environmental protection, and similar provisions intended to minimize property losses, personal injuries and claims for damages at project site. Provide security/protection services and systems in coordination with activities and in a manner to achieve 24-hour, 7-day- per-week effectiveness. Installation to conform with NFPA -IBCrequirements. TEMPORARY FACILITIES 015000-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVACREPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2.04 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES: A. The types of temporary support facilities required include, but not by way of limitation, field offices, drinking water, first aid facilities, bulletin board, telephones, project identification signs, clean-up facilities, waste disposal service, and similar miscellaneous general services, all as may be reasonably required for proficient performance of the work and accommodation of personnel at the site. Discontinue and remove temporary support facilities, and make incidental similar use of permanent work of the project, only when and in manner authorized by Engineer; and, if not otherwise indicated, immediately before time of substantial completion. Locate temporary support facilities for convenience of users, and for minimum interference with construction activities. Note that temporary support facilities will have to be contained within project limits consisting of the project staged construction area. B.Contractor's Field Office: Non required. D.Sanitary Facilities: Contractor shall be allowed to use facilities inside City Hall as long as this privilege is not abused. Owner reserves the right to require Contractor toprovide and maintain, in a sanitary condition, chemical-type portable toilet facilities at the work site for use by contractor personnel if existing facilities are not maintained to Owner's standards of cleanliness and care. Toilet location shall be coordinated with the Owner’s Representative. END OF SECTION 015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 015000-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 017050-CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Project closeout procedures. B.Substantial completion. C.Final acceptance. D.Project record documents. 1.02 PROJECT CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A.Closeout is hereby defined to include general requirements near end of Contract Time, in preparation for final acceptance, final payment, normal termination of contract, occupancy by Owner and similar actions evidencing completion of the Work. Specific requirements for individual units of work are specified in sections of Division 2 through 16. Time of closeout is directly related to "Substantial Completion" and therefore may be either a single time period for entire work or a series of time periods for individual parts of the work which have been certified as substantially complete at different dates. Any time variation shall be applicable to other provisions of this section. 1.03 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A.Prior to requesting Owner's inspection for certification of substantial completion for either entire work or portion thereof, complete the following and list known exceptions in request: 1.List incomplete items, value of incompletion, and reasons for being incomplete for inclusion in "Certificate of Substantial Completion". 2.Advise Owner of pending insurance change-over requirements. 3.Submit specific warranties, workmanship/maintenance bonds, agreements, final certifications and similar documents. 4.Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stocks of materials, and similar physical items to Owner. 5.Complete final cleaning up requirements, including touch-up painting or marred surfaces. 6.Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes. B.Inspection Procedures: Upon receipt of Contractor's request, Owner will either proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled. Following initial inspection, Owner will either prepare certificate of substantial completion, or advise Contractor of work which must be performed prior to issuance of certificate; and repeat inspection when requested and assured that work has been substantially completed. Results of completed inspection will form initial "punch-list" for final acceptance. 1.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A.Prior to requesting Owner's final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, as required by General Conditions, complete the following and list known exceptions in request: 1.Submit final payment request supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. 2.Submit copy of Owner's final punch-list of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 017050-1 3.Submit final liquidated damages settlement statement, acceptable to Owner, if required. 4.Submit project record documents, specified guarantees, operation and maintenance data, and similar final record information. 5.Submit proof, satisfactory to Owner, that taxes, fees and similar obligations of Contractor have been paid. Submit Iowa Department of Revenue Form 35-002 for sales tax refund. 6.The Contractor shall return to the Owner all keys borrowed during thecourse of the project. B.Reinspection Procedure: Upon receipt of Contractor's notice that the work has been completed, including punch-list resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed because of acceptable circumstances, Owner will reinspect the work. Upon completion of reinspection, Owner will either prepare certificate of final acceptance or advise Contractor of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final acceptance. If necessary, procedure will be repeated. C.Reinspection Costs: Should Engineer be required to perform second inspection because of failure of work to comply with original certifications of Contractor, Contractor will compensate Owner for additional services, and deduct amount paid from final payment to Contractor. 1.05 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A.Deliver to Owner upon completion of project; obtain receipt prior to final payment. Reference Section 017200. 1.06 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A.Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specifications sections. B.Deliver to project site and place in location as directed by the Owner; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 2 -PRODUCTS A.Not used. PART 3 -EXECUTION A.Not used. END OF SECTION 017050 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 017050-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 017200-PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A.Section includes: 1.The Contractor shall maintain at the job site one copy of: a.Record Contract Drawings b.Record Project Manual c.Addenda d.Review Shop Drawings e.Change Orders f.Other modifications to Contract g.Field test records 2.Store documents in cabinets in temporary field office, apart from documents used for construction. 3.Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition. 4.Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. 5.Make documents available for inspection by the Engineer and the Owner's Representative. 6.Failure to maintain documents up-to-date will be cause for withholding payments to the Contractor. 1.02 RECORDING A.Label each document "Project Record". B.Keep record documents current. C.Do not permanently conceal any work until required information has been recorded. D.Contract Drawings: 1.Contractor may at his option enter required information on a "working set" and then at completion of project transfer the information to final submitted "Project Record" set. 2.Contractor shall legibly mark to record actual construction: a.Field change of dimension and detail. b.Changes made by Change Order or Field Order. c.Details not on original Contract Drawings. E.Project Manual and Addenda: 1.The Contractor shall legible mark up each section to record: a.Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. b.Changes made by Change Order or Field Order. c.Other items not originally specified. 1.03 SUBMITTAL A.At completion of project, deliver Record Documents to the Owner's Representative prior to issuing final payment. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017200-1 B.Accompany submittal with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: 1.Date 2.Project title and number 3.Contractor's name and address 4.Title and number of each record document 5.Certification that each document as submitted is complete and accurate. 6.Signature of the Contractor, or his authorized representative. PART 2 -PRODUCTS-Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION-Not Used. END OF SECTION 017200 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017200-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 017329-CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02SUMMARY A.This Section includes procedural requirements for cutting and patching. B.Related Sections include the following: 1.Division01 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition of selected portions of the building. 2.Divisions02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work. 3.Division07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching fire-rated construction. 1.03DEFINITIONS A.Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. B.Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work. 1.04SUBMITTALS A.Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1.Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided. 2.Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. 3.Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4.Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5.Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. Listservices/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted. 6.Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. 7.Architect’s Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work. 1.05QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B.Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1.Primary operational systems and equipment. 2.Air or smoke barriers. 3.Fire-suppression systems. 4.Mechanical systems piping and ducts. 5.Control systems. 6.Communication systems. 7.Conveying systems. 8.Electrical wiring systems. C.Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1.Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. 2.Membranes and flashings. 3.Exterior curtain-wall construction. 4.Equipment supports. 5.Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. 6.Noise-and vibration-control elements and systems. D.Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. E.Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meetat Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. 1.06WARRANTY A.Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. B.In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1.If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01EXAMINATION A.Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditionsunder which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1.Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers. 2.Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02PREPARATION A.Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. B.Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. C.Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. D.Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. 3.03PERFORMANCE A.General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1.Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B.Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1.In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2.Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3.Concrete / Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond- core drill. 4.Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 5.Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6.Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections. 1.Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. 2.Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. a.Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b.Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3.Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coveringsand replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a.Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4.Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even- plane surface of uniform appearance. 5.Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. D.Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Completely remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials. END OF SECTION017329 CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 017823-OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02SUMMARY A.This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1.Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. B.Related Sections include the following: 1.Division01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2.Division01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 3.Division01 Section "Project Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for operation and maintenance manuals. 4.Divisions02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.03DEFINITIONS A.System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B.Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.04SUBMITTALS A.Initial Submittal: Submit 1electronic draft copies of each manual at least 15days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return 1 electronic copyof draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. B.Final Submittal: Submit 1 electronicof each manual in final form at least 5days before final inspection. Architect will return1 electroniccopy with comments within 15days after final inspection. 1.Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 1 electronic copyof each corrected manual within 15days of receipt of Architect's comments. 1.05COORDINATION A.Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A.Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1.List of documents. 2.List of systems. 3.List of equipment. 4.Table of contents. B.List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include referencesto operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C.List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D.Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E.Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAEGuideline4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.02MANUALS, GENERAL A.Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1.Title page. 2.Table of contents. 3.Manual contents. B.Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information: 1.Subject matter included in manual. 2.Name and address of Project. 3.Name and address of Owner. 4.Dateof submittal. 5.Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6.Name and address of Architect. 7.Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C.Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1.If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for allvolumes in each volume of the set. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 D.Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. 1.Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inchpaper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a.If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b.Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2.Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3.Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. 4.Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inchwhite bond paper. 5.Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a.If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b.If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.03OPERATION MANUALS A.Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1.System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. 2.Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3.Operating standards. 4.Operating procedures. 5.Operating logs. 6.Wiring diagrams. 7.Control diagrams. 8.Piped system diagrams. 9.Precautions against improper use. 10.License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B.Descriptions: Include the following: 1.Product name and model number. 2.Manufacturer's name. 3.Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4.Equipment function. 5.Operating characteristics. 6.Limiting conditions. 7.Performance curves. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 8.Engineering data and tests. 9.Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C.Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1.Startup procedures. 2.Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3.Routine and normal operating instructions. 4.Regulation and control procedures. 5.Instructions on stopping. 6.Normal shutdown instructions. 7.Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8.Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9.Special operating instructions and procedures. D.Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E.Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.04PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A.Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B.Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C.Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1.Product name and model number. 2.Manufacturer's name. 3.Color, pattern, and texture. 4.Material and chemical composition. 5.Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D.Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1.Inspection procedures. 2.Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3.List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4.Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5.Repair instructions. E.Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. F.Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1.Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2.05SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL A.Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B.Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual. C.Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1.Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2.Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3.Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4.List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D.Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1.Test and inspection instructions. 2.Troubleshooting guide. 3.Precautions against improper maintenance. 4.Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5.Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6.Demonstration and training videotape, if available. E.Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1.Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2.Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F.Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G.Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. H.Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1.Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-5 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01MANUAL PREPARATION A.Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B.Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C.Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D.Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1.Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2.Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E.Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1.Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F.Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1.Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2.Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division01 Section "Project Record Documents." G.Comply with Division01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823-6 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 017900-DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02SUMMARY A.This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1.Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2.Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3.Demonstration and training videotapes. B.Related Sections include the following: 1.Division01 Section "Allowances" for administrative and procedural requirements for demonstration and training allowances. 2.Division01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements for preinstruction conferences. 3.Divisions02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections. C.Allowances: Furnish demonstration and training instruction time under the Demonstration and Training Allowance as specified in Division01 Section "Allowances." D.Unit Price for Instruction Time: Length of instruction time will be measured by actual time spent performing demonstration and training in required location. No payment will be made for time spent assemblingeducational materials, setting up, or cleaning up. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Instruction Program: Submit 1 electroniccopies of outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. B.Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. B.Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: 1.Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2.Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3.Review required content of instruction. 4.For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable. 1.05COORDINATION A.Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations. B.Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C.Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A.Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections, and as follows: 1.HVAC systems 2.HVAC instrumentation and controls 3.Electrical service and distribution B.Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module, include instruction for the following: 1.Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a.System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b.Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c.Operating standards. d.Regulatory requirements. e.Equipment function. f.Operating characteristics. g.Limiting conditions. h.Performance curves. 2.Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a.Emergency manuals. b.Operations manuals. c.Maintenance manuals. d.Project Record Documents. e.Identification systems. f.Warranties and bonds. g.Maintenance service agreements and similarcontinuing commitments. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3.Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable: a.Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages. b.Instructions on stopping. c.Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d.Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e.Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f.Special operating instructions and procedures. 4.Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a.Startup procedures. b.Equipment or system break-in procedures. c.Routine and normal operating instructions. d.Regulation and control procedures. e.Control sequences. f.Safety procedures. g.Instructions on stopping. h.Normal shutdown instructions. i.Operating procedures for emergencies. j.Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k.Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. l.Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. m.Special operating instructions and procedures. 5.Adjustments: Include the following: a.Alignments. b.Checking adjustments. c.Noise and vibration adjustments. d.Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6.Troubleshooting: Include the following: a.Diagnostic instructions. b.Test and inspection procedures. 7.Maintenance: Include the following: a.Inspection procedures. b.Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c.List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. d.Procedures for routine cleaning e.Procedures for preventive maintenance. f.Procedures for routine maintenance. g.Instruction on use of special tools. 8.Repairs: Include the following: a.Diagnosis instructions. b.Repair instructions. c.Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d.Instructions for identifying parts and components. e.Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01PREPARATION A.Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual. B.Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 3.02INSTRUCTION A.Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B.Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1.Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatoryrequirements. 2.Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3.Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. C.Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1.Schedule training with Ownerwith at least sevendays' advance notice. D.Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and remove from project site. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. END OF SECTION017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900-4 Division 23 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) 23 Division CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 230010-HVACGENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01GENERAL A.Refer toDivision 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 -General Requirements, which all apply to work under this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.This section applies to all work under the HVACcontract. This shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following: 1.Piping Insulation 2.Ductwork for Air Distribution 3.Grilles, Registers, Diffusers and Dampers 4.Exhaust Fans and Ducts 5.Thermostats and Control Wiring 6.Insulation of Ducts and Plenums 7.Furnaces and Condensing Units and Refrigerant Piping 8.Unit Air Conditioners 9.Hot Water Boiler 10.Water Chillers 11.Terminal Heating and Cooling Units 12.Hydronic Piping B.The work shall include all materials, equipment and labor required for complete and properly functioning HVACsystems. C.Drawings for HVACwork are in part diagrammatic, intended to convey the scope of work and indicate general arrangement of equipment, piping and approximate sizes and locations of equipment and materials. D.Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated locations and arrangements, make such changes without additional cost to Owner. E.Because of the scale of the drawings, certain piping or items such as unions or fittings may not be shown, but where such items are required by other sections of the specifications, or where they are required by the nature of the work, they shall be furnished and installed. F.All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. G.All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. 1.03CODES AND STANDARDS A.All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable portion of the following codes and standards: 1.International Mechanical Code 2.UniformPlumbing Code 3.International Building Code 4.National Electric Code (NEC) HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 5.National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) 6.Local Utility Company Requirements 7.Local Codes, all trades 8.Standards of ASME, ASHRAE, NEMA, IEEE, AGA, SMACNA 9.Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) 10.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) 11.Iowa Administrative Codes 12.Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) B.Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all codes and standards applicable to their work and shall notify Design Professionalof any discrepancies between the design and applicable code requirements so that any conflicts can be resolved. Where two or more codes or standardsare in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship shall take precedence, but such questions shall be referred to Design Professionalfor final decision. C.Where drawings or specifications call for workmanship or materials in excess of code requirements, a lower grade of construction will not be permitted. 1.04REQUIREMENTS & FEES OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A.Secure all required permits and pay for all inspections, licenses and feesrequired in connection with the HVACwork. Contractor shall post all bonds and obtain all licenses required by the State, City, County and Utility. 1.05HVACDRAWINGS A.The HVACdrawings indicate in general the building arrangement only, Contractor shall examine construction drawings to familiarize himself with the specific typeof building construction, i.e. type of structural system, floors, walls, ceilings, room finishes and elevations. B.Drawings are intended to convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangement and locations of ducts,pipingand equipment. C.Contractor shall layout his own work and shall be responsible for determining the exact locations for equipment and rough-ins and the exact routing of piping and ducts so as to best fit the layout of the work. D.Contractor shall take his own field measurements for verifying locations and dimensions: scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient for laying out the work. E.Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as pipe fittings and valves may not be shown, but where such items are required by code or by other sections of the specifications, such items shall be furnished and installed. 1.06ACTIVE SERVICES A.Contractor shall be responsible for verifying exact location of all existing services prior to beginning work in that area. B.Existing active services, i.e., water, gas, sewer, electric, when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services which are to remain. C.When active services are encountered which require relocation, Contractor shall make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. D.Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.07SITE INSPECTION A.Contractorshall inspect the site prior to submitting bid for work to familiarize himself with the conditions of the site which will affect his work and shall verify points of connection with utilities, routing of outside piping to include required clearances from any existing structures, trees or other obstacles. B.Extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the work required because of Contractor's failure to make this inspection. 1.08COORDINATION AND COOPERATION A.It shall be Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate his work with the schedule of the General Contractor so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. B.Contractor shall fully examine the drawings and specifications for other trades and shall coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the other contractors. Contractor shall consult and cooperate with the other contractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. Design Professionalreserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the various contractors. C.Drawings and specifications are intendedto be complimentary. Any work shown in either of them, whether in the other or not, shall be executed according to the true intent and meaning thereof, the same as if set forth in all. Conflicts between the drawings and the specifications, or between the requirements set forth for the various contractors shall be called to the attention of Design Professional. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required and that Contractor is in agreement withthe drawings and specifications as issued. If clarification is required after the contract is awarded, such clarification will be made by Design Professionaland his decision will be final. D.Special care shall be taken for protection for all equipment. All equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting and plaster until the project is substantially completed. Damage from rust, paint and scratches shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. E.Protection of all equipment during the painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the Painting Contractor, but this shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided. F.Where the final installation or connection of equipment in the building requires Contractor to work in finished areas of the building, Contractorshall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. Contractor shall arrange with the General Contractor for patching and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged in this respect. 1.09OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING A.Refer to Division 1 for additional cutting and patching information. B.Piping, sleeves and ducts passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall/floor and pipe, sleeve, and/or duct shall be sealed with UL listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall/floor. Where piping, sleeves and ducts pass through floors, roofs, walls and partitions that are not fire or smoke rated, penetrations shall be sealed with grout or caulk. HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.Existing Structure: 1.Contractor shall provide cutting, lintelsand patching, and patch painting in the existing structure, as required for the installation of his work, and shall furnish lintels and supports as required for openings. 2.Cutting of structural support members will not be permitted without prior approval of the Design Professional. Extent of cutting shall be minimized; use core drills, power saws or other machines which will provide neat, minimum openings. 3.Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and shall be performed by craftsmen skilled in the respective craft required. 1.10EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING A.Contractor shall do all excavating necessary for hydronic piping, gas piping, etc., and shall backfill trenches and excavations after work has been inspected. Care shall be taken in excavating that walls and footings and adjacent load bearing soils are not disturbed in any way, except where lines must cross under a wall footing. Where a line must pass under a footing, the crossing shall be made by the smallest possible trench to accommodate the pipe. Excavation shall be kept free from water by pumping if necessary. B.Backfill about the structure shall be placed, when practical, as the work of construction progresses. Backfilling on or against concrete work shall be done onlywhen directed. Backfilling of trenches shall progress as rapidly as the testing and acceptance of the finished sections of the work will permit and shall be carried to a crown approximately six (6) inches above existing grades. In backfilling trenches, selected material shall be compacted firmly around and to a depth of not less than six (6) inches over the top of work in trench. All fill and backfill and rough grading shall be compacted thoroughly in layers and shall be brought up to within six (6) inches of finished grades. All fill and backfill shall be sand or pit run sand/gravel graded from 1" size downward, if excavated material is not suitable for backfill. 1.11MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A.All materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a reputable U.S.A. manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified item. Where two or more units are required of the same item, they shall be furnished by the same manufacturer except where specified otherwise. B.All material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C.The equipment specifications cannot deal individually with any minute items such as parts, controls, devices, etc., which may be required to produce the equipment performanceand function as specified, or as required to meet the equipment guarantees. Such items, when required, shall be furnished as part of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. 1.12SHOP DRAWINGS A.Contractor shall furnish, to Design Professional,complete sets of shop drawings and other submittal data. Contractor shall review and sign shop drawings before submittal. B.Shop drawings shall be bound into sets and cover related items for a complete system as much as practical and shall be identified with symbols or "plan marks" used on drawings. Incomplete, piecemeal or unbound submittals will be rejected. C.Submittals required by the various sections of the Project Manual include, but are not necessarily limited to those identified in the submittal schedule below. HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 D.After award of contract, Contractor shall provide a completed submittal schedule including dates that the submittals will be to Design Professionalfor review. E.Submit required information on the following items: CERTIFICATE OTHER SPECDETAILPRODINSTALLO & M OF DEMON- (SEE SECTIONEQUIPMENTDWGSDATASAMPLESMETHODSMANUAL STRATION NOTES) 23 0548Vibration Controls for HVAC X Piping and Equipment 23 0553HVAC IdentificationX 23 0593Testing, Adjusting and1 Balancing for HVAC 23 0700HVAC InsulationX 23 0900Instrumentation and Control XXXX for HVAC 23 3113Metal DuctsXX1 23 3300Air Duct AccessoriesXX 23 7400Packaged Outdoor HVACXX Equipment 23 8126Split System Air ConditionerXX NOTES: 1.Submit test reports as described in specification section. F.Design Professionalwill review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the plans and specifications. G.Contract requirements cannotbe changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings and specifications. 1.13OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to Design Professionalin duplicate upon completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard-backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR HVACSYSTEMS (PROJECT NAME) (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR) HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010-5 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B.Provide a master index at the beginning of manual showing items included. Use plastic tab indexes for sections of manual. Each section shall contain the following information for equipment furnished under this contract: 1.Equipment and system warranties andguarantees. 2.Installation instructions. 3.Operating instructions. 4.Maintenance instructions. 5.Spare parts identification and ordering list. 6.Local service organization, address, contract and phone number. 7.Shop drawings with reviewed stamp of Design Professionaland Contractor shall be included, if applicable, along with the items listed above. 8.Reports of all tests and demonstrations including certificate of owner instruction, testing and balancing report, etc. 1.14TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A.Tests Required: Piping shall be tested and proved tight under the following static pressures. Pressure shall be maintained for four (4) hours. Pressure System Hydronic Piping150 psi (water) Steam Piping150psi (water) Oil Piping150 psi air pressure. RefrigerationPiping: Precharged LinesCharge and operate unit. Check for leaks with electronic leak detector. Fuel Piping100 psi air pressure or 150% of operating pressure (whichever is greater) B.All systems shall be tested by Contractor and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to Owner. Contractor shall submit a report to Design Professionalciting dates, times, pressures, and results of all tests performed. 1.15TRAINING AND DEMONSTRATIONS A.Prior to acceptance of the HVACinstallation, Contractor shall provide to Owner, or his designated representatives, all comprehensive training on essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. 1.Provide adequate notice to Owner as to when instruction will be conducted so appropriate personnel can be present. 2.Prepare the instruction format for a minimum of four Owner Representatives. B.Equipment training: 1.Manufacturer's representatives shall provide instructionon each major piece of equipment. Contractor shall provide instruction on all other equipment. 2.Training sessions shall use the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction materials included in the O&M manuals and emphasize preventative maintenance and safe operating procedures. 3.Training shall be performed by qualified factory trained technicians. HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010-6 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 4.HVACContractor shall attend all sessions performed by the manufacturer's representative and shall add to each session any special information relating to the details of installation of the equipment as it might impact the operation and maintenance. 5.Equipment training shall occur as soon as possible after start up of the equipment and shall include hands-on operation. Training shall be provided for equipment listed in the table below. C.System training: 1.HVAC and Temperature Controls Contractors shall jointly conduct system operating training. These sessions shall include hands-on demonstrations of system wide start-up, operation in all possiblemodes, shut-down and emergency procedures. D.The following are minimum requirements for Owner instruction: SectionDescriptionHoursPresented ByOthers PresentRemarks (Note 1) 23 0010HVAC System 8Mech. Contractor Note 2 (Excluding Equipment) T.C. Contractor 23 7400Central HVAC Equip.4Mech. Contractor 23 0900Temperature Control 40Manufacturer's RepresentativeNote 3 System 23 8126Split System Air 2Mech. Contractor Conditioner 1. Any unused hours shall be used at Owner's discretion during the first year of occupancy. 2.System training shall include, but not be limited to, valve locations, system routing, and air/water flow patterns, system start-up/shut-down/emergency procedures. 3.Training shall occur in several sessions over the course of the first year of operation. A minimum of four separate dates are required for temperature controls, two dates for chillers. E.Contractor shall submit to Design Professionala certificate, signed by Owner stating the date, time and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows: HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010-7 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION This document is to certify that Contractor has demonstrated the hereafter listed systems to Owner's representatives in accordance with the Contract documents and that the instruction has been completed to Owner's satisfaction. A.Project: B.System(s): C.Contractor's representatives giving instruction and demonstration: Contractor: NAMESDATEHOURS D.Owner's representatives receiving instruction: Owner: NAMESDATEHOURS E.Acknowledgement of demonstration: Contractor's Representative: signature date Owner's Representative: signature date HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010-8 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.16SUBSTITUTIONS A.Refer to Divisions 00 and 01. B.Where substitutions are approved, Contractor assumes all responsibility for physical dimensions and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of the substitution. 1.17ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.In most cases, equipment specifications are based on a specific manufacturer's type, style, dimensional data, catalog number, etc. Listed with the base specification, either in the manual or on the plan schedules are acceptable manufacturers approved to bid products of equal quality. These manufacturers are encouraged to submit to Design Professionalat least 8 days prior to the bid due date drawings and catalog numbers of products to be bid as equals. B.Manufacturers who do not submit prior to bidding, run the risk of having the product rejected at time of shop drawing submittal. Extra costs associated with replacing the rejected product shall be the responsibility of Contractor and/or the manufacturer. C.If Contractor chooses to use a manufacturer listed as an equal, it shall be his responsibility to assure that the manufacturer has complied with the requirements in 'A' above. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for physical dimensions (including accessibility for maintenance), operating characteristics, and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of using the alternate manufacturer. D.Where a model or catalog number is provided, it may not be inclusive of all product requirements. Refer to additional requirements provided on the plans or in the specifications as required. Similarly, there may be additional requirements included in the model or catalog number that are not specifically stated. These requirements shall also be met. 1.18GUARANTEE A.The entire HVACsystem including all sub-systems shall be guaranteed against defect in materials and installation for a minimum of one year from substantial completion or beneficial occupancy whichever occurs earlier. Any malfunctions which occur within the guarantee period shall be promptly corrected without cost to Owner. This guarantee shall not limit or void any manufacturer's express or implied warranties. 1.19COMPLETION A.Systems, at time of completion, shall be complete, efficiently operating, non-hazardous and ready for normal use by Owner. B.Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all debris, excess material and equipment left during the progress of this contract at job completion. 1.20CLEANING A.Prior to assembly of pipe and piping components, all loose dirt, scale, oil, and other foreign matter on internal and exteriorsurfaces shall be removed by means consistent with good piping practices.During fabrication andassembly, slug and weld splatter shall be removed from both internal and external pipe joints by preening, chipping, and wire brushing. B.At the conclusion ofthe construction, the entire system of piping and equipment shall be cleaned internally.Prior to flushing erected piping surfaces, Contractor shall disconnect all instrumentation and equipment and open wide all valves. HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010-9 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.All temporary labels, stickers, etc., shall be removed from all fixtures and equipment. Name plates, ratings, instruction plates, etc., shall not be obscured by paint, insulation, or placement of units. D.Heating and air conditioning equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and clean filters installed. 1.21ELECTRICAL WORK A.Electrical work and equipment provided by HVACContractor shall include the following: 1.Starters and disconnects for motors of HVACequipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 2.Wiring from motors to disconnect switches or junction boxes for motors of HVAC equipment, but only where specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with equipment. 3.Electrical heating coils and similar elements in HVACequipment. 4.All control wiring in accordance with the requirements of Division 26. B.Electrical Contractor shall provide all power wiring for HVACequipment, including services for motors and equipment furnished by the HVACcontractor. Motor and equipment locations are shown on the electrical drawings. C.Electrical Contractor shall make final connections for all motors and equipment furnished by the HVACcontractor. D.Electrical Contractor shall furnish safety disconnects and starters for all motors and equipment furnished by the HVACcontractor (unless specifically indicated to be furnished integrally with the equipment), so as to make service complete to each item of equipment. E.Contractor shall consult with Electrical Contractor prior to conduit rough-in and shall verify with him the exact locations for rough-ins, and the exact size and characteristics of the services required, and shall provide Electrical Contractor a schedule of electrical loads for the equipment furnished by him. These schedules will be used for sizing services, disconnects, fuses, starters and overload protection. F.Refer to Division 23Controls section for control system wiring. Control wiring shall be done in accordance with the requirements of Division 26. G.All conduit installed for control wiring shall be blue. Labeled conduit will not be accepted. H.Control wiring, where not exposed, may be installed without conduit. Wiring in ducts, plenums and other air handling spaces shall be specifically listed for the use. All exposed control wiring and wiring behind inaccessible construction (such as in walls and above drywall ceilings) shall be routed in blue conduit. All wall penetrations shall be sleeved with blue conduit. Installation shall comply with all code requirements. 1.22ACCESS DOORS A.When HVACContractor provides any equipment requiring periodic servicing which will be concealed by non-accessible architectural construction, HVACContractor shall provide a flush access door. The access door shall be equal to a Karp DSC-211 Universal access door or Nystrom APWB ortype for the specific construction involved. B.Access doors in fire rated construction shall be fire rated and have U.L. label. HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010-10 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.Construction 1.Door and trim shall be 13 gauge steel, frames shall be 16 gauge steel. 2.Trim shall be of one piece construction. 3.Finish shall be prime coat of rust inhibitive baked grey enamel. 4.Hinges shall be concealed, offset, floating hinge. 5.Locks shall be flush, screwdriver operated with stainless steel cam-and-studs. 1.23TEMPORARY UTILITIES A.Refer to Division 01 for specific requirements concerning temporary utilities. B.Under no circumstances shall the building HVAC equipment be used for temporary heat, cooling or ventilation during construction prior to Owner acceptance of the building at substantial completion. 1.25CONCRETE EQUIPMENTPADS A.Provide equipment housekeeping pads for all floor mounted equipment.Anchor equipment to concrete equipment pads according to equipment manufacturer’s recommendations. 1.Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or as required to be 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.Pads to be a minimum of 4” in height unless noted otherwise. 2.Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor.Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3.Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4.Place and secure anchorage devices.Use supported equipment manufacturer’s setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5.Install anchor bolts according to manufacturer’s recommendations and to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6.Use 3000-psi compressive strength concrete with #3 rebar 12” O.C. END OF SECTION 230010 HVAC GENERAL PROVISIONS 23 0010-11 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 230500-COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01GENERAL A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 230010 -HVACGeneral Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.This section includes the following: 1.Demolition 2.Sleeves 3.Escutcheons 4.Fire Stopping 5.Guards PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01DEMOLITION MATERIALS A.All materials removed shall be the property of the removing contractor and shall be removed from the site by him, unless otherwise specified. 2.02SLEEVES A.Sleeves passing through non-load bearing walls and partitions shall be galvanized sheet steel with lock seam joints of minimum gauges as follows: 1.For pipes 2-1/2" and smaller -24 gauge 2.For pipes 3" to 6" -22 gauge 3.For pipes over 6" -20 gauge B.Sleeves passing through load bearing walls, concrete beams, fireproof walls, foundations, footings and waterproof floors shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe or cast iron pipe. C.Sleeves are not required in masonry walls which are core drilled or walls of drywall construction, except where partition is a firestop, smokestop, or side of air plenum. D.Sleeves for insulated piping shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and insulationand to allow for free movement of pipe. Waterproof sleeves shall be of sufficient internal diameter to take pipe and waterproofing material. E.In finished areas where pipes are exposed, sleeves shall be terminated flush with wall, partitions and ceilings,and shall extend 1/2" above finished floors. Extend sleeves 1" above finished floors in areas likely to entrap water and fill space between sleeves and pipe with graphite packing and caulking compound. F.Sleeves passing through membrane waterproofing or lead safe shall be provided with flashing, furnished and installed by General Contractor, extending 12" beyond sleeve in all directions; flashing shall be secured and sealed to membrane or lead safe and shall be sealed to sleeve and caulked watertight. Sleeves passing through roof shall be installed in same manner except sleeves shall extend to 6" above roof. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 0500-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 G.For exterior walls below grade, sleeves shall be cast iron. Space between sleeve and pipe shall be sealed with modular rubber links tightened with bolts (Link-Seal or equal). Waterproofing of pipe penetrations in exterior walls shall be coordinated with waterproofing contractor. 2.03ESCUTCHEONS A.Provide chrome plated escutcheons at each sleeved opening into finished spaces. Escutcheons shall fit aroundinsulation or around pipe when not insulated; outside diameter shall cover sleeve. Where sleeve extends above finished floor, escutcheon shall be high cap type and shall clear sleeve extension. Secure escutcheons or plates to sleeve but not to insulation with set screws or other approved devices. 2.04FIRESTOPPING A.Piping, sleeves and ducts passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall/floor and pipe, sleeve, and/or duct shall be sealed with UL Listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall/floor. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01DEMOLITION A.General: 1.Demolition shall be accomplished by the proper tools and equipment for the work to be removed. Personnel shall be experienced and qualified in the type of work to be performed. 2.Contractor shall remove existing equipment and piping not necessary for additions or existing portions of building as indicated on drawings and/or specified herein. To include all abandoned equipment and piping back to point of origin. 3.Contractor shall be responsible for the cutting and capping of all existing services before any work is commenced by the General Contractor. B.Work by Others:Unless specifically noted under other contracts, Contractor shall assume all required work shall be performed by him. In general, the following will be performed by others: 1.General Contractor will remove any floors, walls and ceilings, neatly patch, match, complete and finish all affected surfaces. 2.ElectricalContractor will disconnect all electrical services and remove abandoned conduit back to point of origin. C.Existing Conditions: 1.If any piping serving existing fixtures or equipment which are to remain are disturbed by operations under this Contract, Contractor shall provide pipe and insulation required to reestablish continuity of such piping systems. 2.Contractor shall arrange for General Contractor to repair, patch and paint all construction, with material necessary to match surrounding material, which isnecessary due to removal of equipmentandpiping. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 0500-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3.Contractor shall furnish all required labor and material where required to extend new work to connect to similar work where new addition adjoins existing building and for extension of existing system. Connection shall be made in a suitable manner. D.Owner'sRight of Salvage: The Owner may designate and have salvage rights to any material herein demolished by the Contractor. 3.02SLEEVES A.Install sleeves for all piping passing through floors, roof, walls, concrete beams and foundations as required by this section. 3.03ESCUTCHEONS A.Install escutcheons for all pipes entering finished spaces. 3.04GUARDS A.Where exposed insulated piping extends to floor, provide sheet metal guard around insulation to extend up from floor 48”. Guard to be galvanized sheet not less than 26 gauge. END OF SECTION 230500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 0500-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 230513-COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVACEQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01GENERAL A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 230010 -HVACGeneral Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose, horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to 600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer’s factory or shipped separately by equipment manufacturer for field installation. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Submit for all motors provided. B.Product Data: Provide wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C.Test Reports: Indicate test results verifying nominal efficiency and power factor for three phase motors larger than 1/2 horsepower. D.Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate setting, mechanical connections, lubrication, and wiring instructions. 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.ANSI/NSF 372 Certification: All potable water supply piping valves (excluding main gate valves greater than 2”) shall meet the requirements of ANSI/NSF 372 Certification, Drinking Water System Components,Lead Content. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01GENERAL A.Comply with NEMA MG1 unless noted otherwise. B.Constant Speed Motors:Minimum 1.15 service factor; rated at 40 deg. C. ambient temperature with 90 deg. C. temperature rise (Class B insulation). C.Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Inverter duty rated, Class F insulation (minimum). Windings shall be copper magnet with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced bypulse-width modulated inverters. D.Multiple speed motors: Multiple windings. E.Motor Efficiency: Premium efficiency as defined in NEMAMG1. F.Peak instantaneous current: Maximum 130% of full-load. COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 0513-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 G.All motors shall be provided as required for motor orientation within equipment. H.Horsepower ratings shall be adequate for operating the connected loads continuously in the prevailing ambient temperatures in areas where the motors are installed, without exceeding the NEMA standard temperature rises for the motorinsulations. I.Motor designs, as indicated by the NEMA code letters, shall be coordinated with the connected loads to assure adequate starting and running torques. J.Motor Enclosures: 1.Shall be the NEMA types shown on the drawings for the motors. 2.Where the types of motor enclosures are not shown on the drawings, they shall be the NEMA types which are most suitable for the environmental conditions where the motors are being installed. Motors located outdoors to be totally enclosed weatherproof epoxy- sealed type. 3.Thoroughly clean and paint the enclosures at the factory with manufacturer's prime coat and standard finish. K.Additional requirements for specific motors, as indicated in other sections, shall also apply. 2.02SINGLE PHASE POWER A.Capacitor start motors starting torque shall be three times full load torque and starting current shall be less than five times full load current. B.Pull-up Torque: Up to 350 percent of full load torque. C.Breakdown Torque: Approximately 250 percent of full load torque. D.Motors: Capacitor in series with starting winding; provide capacitor-start/capacitor-run motors with two capacitors in parallel with run capacitor remaining in circuit at operating speeds. E.Drip-proof Enclosure: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation,NEMA Service Factor, prelubricated sleeve or ball bearings. F.Enclosed Motors: Class A (50 degrees C temperature rise) insulation, 1.0 Service Factor, prelubricated ball bearings. 2.03THREE PHASE POWER -SQUIRREL CAGE MOTORS A.Starting Torque: Between 1 and 1-1/2 times full load torque. B.Starting Current: Six times full load current. C.Power Output, Locked Rotor Torque, Breakdown or Pull Out Torque: NEMA Design B characteristics. D.Design, Construction, Testing and Performance: Conform to NEMA MG 1 for Design B motors. E.Insulation System: NEMA Class B or better. F.Testing Procedure: In accordance with IEEE 112. Load test motors to determine free from electrical or mechanical defects in compliance with performance data. G.Motor Frames: NEMA Standard T-Framesof steel, aluminum or cast iron with end brackets of cast iron or aluminum with steel inserts. COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 0513-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 H.Thermistor System (Motor Frame Sizes 254T and Larger): Three PTC thermistors imbedded in motor windings and epoxy encapsulated solid state control relay for wiring into motor starter. I.Bearings: Grease lubricated anti-friction ball bearings with housings equipped with plugged provision for relubrication, rated for minimum AFBMA 9, L-10 life of 20,000 hours. Calculate bearing load with NEMA minimum V-belt pulley with belt center line at end of NEMA standard shaft extension. Stamp bearing sizes on nameplate. PART 3 -EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 230513 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 0513-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 0529 -HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Provide materials, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install hangers, supports, anchors, guides and seals as required by the drawings and this section. B.Types of supports, anchorsand seals specified in this section include the following: 1.Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports. 2.Vertical-Piping Clamps. 3.Hanger-Rod Attachments. 4.Building Attachments. 5.Saddles and Shields. 6.Miscellaneous Materials. 7.Anchors. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Code Compliance: Comply with applicable plumbing and mechanical codes pertaining to product materials and installation of supports, anchors and seals. B.UL and FM Compliance: Provide products which are Underwriters Laboratories listed and Factory Mutual approved. C.ANSI Compliance: All supports and parts shall conform to the latest requirements of the ANSI Code for Pressure Piping B31.1.0 except as supplemented or modified by the requirements of this specification. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are as follows, with catalog numbers based on Grinnell: 1.Anvil International 2.B-Line 3.Elcen 4.Unistrut Building Systems 5.Grinnell B.Pipe support systems shall secure pipes in place, prevent pipe vibration, provide vertical adjustment for maintaining required grades, and provide for expansion and contraction. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVACPIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0529-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of operation. They shall allow free expansion and contraction of the piping, and prevent excessive stress resulting from transferred weight being induced into the pipe or connected equipment. D.Wherever possible, pipe attachments for horizontal piping shall be pipe clamps. E.Wherever possible, structural attachments shall be beam clamps. F.All rigid hangers shall provide a means of vertical adjustment after erection. G.Hanger rods shall be subject to tensile loading only. At hanger locations where lateral or axial movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit swing. H.Where horizontal piping movements are greater than 1/2 inch, or where the hanger rod angularity from the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold to hot position of the pipe, the hanger pipe and structural attachments shall be offset in such manner that the rod is vertical in the hot position. I.Hangers shall be designed so that they cannot become disengaged by movements of the supported pipe. J.Where supports are attached to concrete or other structural members, care shall be taken to prevent damage or weakening of the structural members. K.Where concrete inserts are used, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to accurately locate and attach inserts to concrete forms. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION -HORIZONTAL PIPE SUPPORT A.Hanger rods for steel and copper pipe shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule: Nominal PipeMinimum Rod Diameter, in. Size, in. Maximum Span, ft. up to 1103/8 1-1/2103/8 2103/8 2-1/2111/2 3121/2 3-1/2131/2 4145/8 5165/8 6173/4 8197/8 10227/8 12237/8 For 1/2 in. copper tube, 8 ft. spacing of hangers is recommended. B.In addition to the above specified spacings, install additional hangers at change in pipe direction and at concentrated loads, large valves, strainers, etc. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVACPIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0529-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.When two or more pipes are to be run parallel together, they may be supported on trapeze type hangers. Trapeze bar angles or channels and hanger rods shall be of sufficient size with required spacing to support the particular group of pipes. D.For suspending hanger rods from brackets attached to walls; use welded steel brackets, Fig 194 for loads up to 750 lbs; Fig. 195 for loads up to 1,500 lbs; Fig. 199 for loads up to 3000 lbs. E.Exterior refrigerant piping shall be supported with steel angle or steel channel strut supports as detailed on the drawings. F.Where pipes are to be racked along walls, use malleable iron one-hole clamp, Fig. 126 for pipes up to 3". For pipes larger than 3", use steel channel strut pipe rack. G.Where pipes are to be supported from floor,use unistrut pipe stand with post base. Unformed concrete will not be permitted. 3.02INSTALLATION -VERTICAL PIPE SUPPORTS A.Support vertical steel and copper pipe at every other floor line. B.In addition to the above, support vertical pipes at base of riser with base fitting set on concrete or block pier, or by hanger located on horizontal connection close to riser. C.Where pipe sleeves extend above floor, place pipe clamps at ceiling below and support clamp extensions from inserts or other approved attachment. 3.03PIPE ATTACHMENTS A.For horizontal steel pipe, use adjustable carbon steel clevis, Fig. 260, for pipes up to 30". B.For horizontal copper pipe and tube, use copper plated adjustable carbon steel clevis, Fig. CT-65. C.When thermal expansion for horizontal pipe is in excess of 1/2" axially as indicated on the drawing, use adjustable steel yoke pipe roll, Fig. 181, or pipe roll stand, Fig. 177. 3.04INTERMEDIATE ATTACHMENTS A.Hanger rods: use carbon steel single or double end threaded, Figs. 140 and 253 as required. Continuous threaded rod, Fig. 146, may be used wherever possible. Contractor may at his option cut and thread rod on the job site. B.Chain, wire or perforated strap hangers will not be permitted. One pipe shall not be suspended from another pipe. C.Hangers shall be supported from appropriate structural members. In no case shall hangers be supported from ductwork, cable trays, piping, or other equipment. Existing hangers and supports shall not be used as supports for new hangers unless specifically designed as such, or additional loadings have been confirmed to be acceptable for existing supports. 3.05STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENTS A.For attaching steel or copper plated hanger rods to reinforced concrete; use black carbon steel concrete inserts, Fig. 285 for loads up to 400 lbs., Fig. 281 for loads up to 1200 lbs. or suitable drilled inserts equal to Ramset/Red Head -Trubolt wedge anchor, Ramset/Red Head Epcon system or Hilti Kwik Bolt II anchor. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVACPIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0529-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B.For attaching steel hanger rods to structural steel beams, use malleable iron C-clamps, Fig. 87, with retaining clip for loads up to 500 lbs.; Fig. 229 with extension piece for loads up to 1,365 lbs. For copper plated hanger rods, use copper plated malleable iron C-clamps, Fig. CT-88, with hardened cup point set screw, for loads up to 400 lbs. C.For attaching steel hanger rods to wood structural members, use malleable iron ceiling flange pipe threaded, Fig. 128 for loads up to 480 lbs., Fig. 153 for loads up to 1270 lbs. For copper plated hanger rods, use copper plated malleable iron ceiling flange, Fig. CT-128R for loads up to 180lbs. D.Under no circumstances shall hangers be attached to metal roof deck. 3.06PIPE AND DUCT COVERING PROTECTION A.Hangers and supports for insulated cold piping and ductwork shall not injure or pierce insulation. Provide insulation protection shields or saddles for piping, Fig. 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165, 165A, 166A, or 167 in conjunction with hanger or roll device. 3.07ROOF MOUNTED PIPING AND EQUIPMENT A.Roof mounted equipment, not specified to be mounted on roof curbs shall be installed on equipment mounting rails specifically designed for that purpose or as shown on plans. B.Roof mounted piping and ductwork shall be mounted on a pipe support system equal to B-Line C- Port. END OF SECTION 23 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVACPIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0529-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 230548-VIBRATIONCONTROLS FOR HVACPIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 230010 -HVACGeneral Conditionsare applicable to work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Extent of vibration isolation work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and/or specified in other Division-23sections. B.All HVACequipment over one horsepower, unless otherwise noted shall be isolated from the structure by means of vibration and noise isolators. C.Where isolator type and deflection are not shown, the related equipment shall be isolated in accordance with the 2003 ASHRAE Handbook -HVAC Applications, Chapter 47. D.Types of vibration isolation products specified in this section include the following: 1.Precompressed Molded Fiberglass Isolators. 2.Elastomeric Isolators. 3.Spring Isolators, Free Standing. 4.Spring Isolators, Vertically-Restrained. 5.Isolation Hangers. 6.Structural Steel Bases. 7.Concrete Inertia Bases. 8.Isolation Rail Systems. 9.Flexible Duct Connectors. 10.Flexible Pipe Connectors. E.Vibration isolation products furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Division-23sections. F.Refer to other sections of these specifications for equipment foundations, hangers, sealants, gaskets and other work related to vibration isolation work. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Product Qualification: Provide each type of vibration isolation unit produced by specialized manufacturer, with not less than 5 years' successful experience in production of units similar to those required for project. 1.The materials and systems specified in this Section shall all beprovided by the Contractor, from a single vibration isolation materials manufacturer to assure single responsibility for the performance of all isolation materials. 1.04SUBMITTALS A.The isolator manufacturer's submittal shall include the complete design for required isolation and bases, and a tabulation of the design data including O.D., free and operating heights of the isolators. VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPINGAND EQUIPMENT 23 0548-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.Vibration Isolation Products 1.Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. 2.Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 3.Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc. 4.Mason Industries B.The following item specifications apply to the corresponding Type numbers used in the Vibration Isolation Schedule. Model Numbers are based on Kinetics Noise Control. 2.02ISOLATION MATERIALS AND SUPPORT UNITS A.Type 1 Isolator: Model KIP-Q Precompressed Molded Fiberglass Noise and Vibration Isolation Pads, individually coated with a flexible moisture impervious elastomeric membrane. Pads shall be fine (.00018 in dia) bonded annealed glass fibers which have been stabilized during manufacture by overloading the material ten times. Pads shall have a constant natural frequency over the operating load range, and the stiffness shall increase proportionately with load applied. Pads shall be no taller than the shortest horizontal dimension. Where the equipment base does not provide a uniform load surface, steel plates shall be bonded to the top of the pads. Alternately, Model RD Neoprene Mounts, incorporating completely enclosed metal inserts to permit boltingto the supported unit, may be used. B.Type 1 Isolator: 5/8” thick neoprene molded pad, incorporating cross ribbed molding for vibration isolation. C.Type 2 Isolators: Model FDS Free-Standing, Unhoused Laterally Stable Steel Springs incorporating leveling bolts and 1/4" thick ribbed noise isolation pads. To assure stability, the spring shall have a lateral spring stiffness greater than 0.8 times the rated vertical stiffness, and shall be designed to provide 50% overload capacity. In capacities up to 5,000lbs., springs shall be replaceable. In capacities over 5,000 lbs. springs shall be welded to the top and bottom load plate assemblies. D.Type 2HHangers: Model SFH Combination Spring and Fiberglass Hangers, incorporating precompressed molded fiberglass noise and vibration isolation pads, coated with a moisture impervious elastomeric membrane in series with springs, all encased in welded steel brackets. Springs shall be as specified for Type 2 Isolators, above. Isolators shall be designed for 50% overload capacity, and shall accommodate rod misalignment over a 30 degree arc. Brackets shall be designed to carry 500% overload without failure. E.Type 3 Isolators: Model FLS, Free-Standing Laterally Stable Spring Isolators, similar to Model FDS, but shall incorporate vertical limit stops to assure a constant operating height if the supported weight is removed, and to reduce movement due to wind loads. Limit stops shall be isolated from the housing to prevent short-circuiting. F.Type 4 Bases: No base required.Isolators may be attached directly to the supported equipment. G.Type 5 and Type 6 Bases: Model SFB and SBB Structural Steel Bases, designed and supplied by the isolator manufacturer. Bases shall be designed with isolator brackets to reduce the mountingheight of the equipment. To assure adequate stiffness, the height of the members shall be a minimum of 8% of the longest span between isolators, or at least 6 inches. Where thinner sections are necessary, due to head room limitations, etc., the section modulus of the members selected shall equal or exceed the section modulus of wide flange steel members whose thickness is 8% of the longest span between isolators. VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPINGAND EQUIPMENT 23 0548-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 H.Type 7 Bases: Model CIB Reinforced Concrete Inertia Bases, the steel members of which are designed and supplied by the isolator manufacturer. The concrete shall be poured into a welded steel frame, incorporating prelocated equipment anchor bolts, 1/2 inch diameter reinforcing bars on nominal 8 inch centers each way, and recessed isolator mounting brackets to reduce the mounting height of the equipment, but yet remain within the confines of the base. The thickness of the base shall be a minimum of 8% of the longest span between isolators, at least 6 inches, or as indicated on the drawings. Where inertia bases are used to mount pumps, the bases shall be wide enough to support piping elbows. I.Type 8 Bases: Model ASR Isolation Rail System, consisting of two parallel aluminum rail systems with continuous neoprene air and water seal, incorporating steel spring isolators designed for one inch static deflection, all fabricated to be installed over the roof curb system, and provide continuous support for the isolated equipment. J.Flexible Duct Connectors: 1.Flexible neoprene or canvas connections of approved construction shall be provided in the ductwork adjacent to all air moving units. 2.High velocityductwork, for a distance of 50 feet from high pressure fans, shall be isolated from the structure by means of Type 2 Hangers described herein. K.Flexible Piping Connectors: 1.Piping over one inch diameter and piping three supports away from rotating or reciprocating HVACequipment shall be isolated from the structure by means of vibration and noise isolators. 2.Suspended piping shall be isolated with Type 2 Hangers described herein. 3.Floor mounted piping shall be isolated with Type 2 Isolators (spring mounts) described herein. 4.Flexible members shall be incorporated in the piping adjacent to all reciprocating and/or rotating equipment and pumps. Flexible pipe connectors not required at in-line pump installations. 5.See Section 230516 -Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVACPiping for pump connector specifications. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS A.General: Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, including definitions of critical and noncritical locations, for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated. B.Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units. 3.02APPLICATIONS A.General: Apply types of vibration isolation materials and units indicated at locations shown or scheduled. Selection is Installer's option where more than one type is indicated. VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPINGAND EQUIPMENT 23 0548-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3.03INSTALLATION A.General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration isolation materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units do not exceed rated operating deflections or bottom out under loading, and are not short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices (if any) intended for temporary protection against overloading during installation. B.Anchor and attach units to substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated. C.Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where leveling devices cannot be used to distribute loading properly. D.Locate isolation hangers as near overhead support structure as possible. E.Bond flanges of flexible duct connectors to ducts and housings to provide airtight connections. Seal seams and penetrations to prevent air leakage. F.Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible. 3.04EXAMINATION OF RELATED WORK A.Installer of vibration isolation work shall observe installation of other work related to vibration isolation work, including work connected to vibration isolation work; and, after completion of other related work (but before equipment startup), shall furnish written report to Contractor listing observed inadequacies for proper operation and performance of vibration isolation work. Report shall cover, but not necessarily be limited to the following: 1.Equipment installations (performed as work of other sections) on vibration isolators. 2.Piping connections including flexible connections. 3.Ductwork Connections including provisions for flexible connections. 4.Passage of piping and ductwork which is to be isolated through walls and floors. B.Do not start up equipment until inadequacies have been corrected in manner acceptable to vibration isolation Installer. END OF SECTION 230548 VIBRATION CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPINGAND EQUIPMENT 23 0548-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 230553-IDENTIFICATIONFOR HVACPIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - and General RequirementsSection 230010 -HVACGeneral Provisionsare applicable to work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Extent of identification work required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division-23sections. B.Type of identification devices specified in this section include the following: 1.Painted identification materials 2.Plastic pipe markers 3.Plastic tape 4.Valve tags C.Identification furnished as part of factory fabricated equipment, is specified as part of the equipment assembly in other Division-23sections. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. 1.04SUBMITTALS A.Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8-1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valvenumber, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition, furnish extra copies for Maintenance Manuals. B.Labeling Nomenclature: Submit list indicating system types with appropriate nomenclature to be provided on the pipe labels. Where possible, match to system labels on drawings. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A.General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division-23sections. Where more than one single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category. B.Painted Identification Materials: 1.Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 3/4" high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2.Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade. 3.Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors. C.Plastic Pipe Markers: 1.General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed flexible or semi-rigid, permanent, color-coded, plastic-sheet pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1. 2.Small Pipes: For external diameters not greater than 6" (including insulation if any), provide full-band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods: a.Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. b.Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. c.Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). d.Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4" wide full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2". 3.Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation if any), provide either full-band or narrow strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods: a.Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). b.Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 1-1/2" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3". c.Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's standard stainless steel bands. 4.Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Design Professionalin cases of variance with names as shown or specified. 5.Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate unit of plastic. D.Plastic Tape: 1.General: Manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick. a.Width: Provide 1-1/2" wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including insulation, if any) of less than 6", 2 1/2" wide tape for larger pipes. b.Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated. E.Valve Tags: 1.Brass Valve Tags: Provide polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 7/16" high, and with 3/16" hole for fastener. Tag thickness 0.040 inches. a.Provide 2" diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated. b.Fill tag engraving with black enamel. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2.Plastic Valve Tags: Provide red heavy plastic tag with 7/16" white embossed sequenced numbers. 3.Valve Tag Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks or heat sealed braided copper wire of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose. F.Name Plates: 1.General: Provide manufacturer’sstandard preprinted plastic, brass, or aluminum with stamped, engraved or embossed letters. 2.Lettering: a.Large Equipment: 1 1/2" lettering as appropriate. b.Small Equipment: 3/4" lettering as appropriate. 3.Attachments: Mounting holes and screws, pressure sensitive adhesive backing, or solid brass chain. 2.02LETTERING AND GRAPHICS A.General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in HVACidentification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of HVACsystems and equipment. 1.Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown and specified, provide identification which indicates individual system number as well as service (as examples; Boiler No. 3, Air Supply No. 1H, Standpipe F12). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A.General Installation Requirements: 1.Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish including valve tags, install identification after completion of covering and painting if any. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar concealment. B.Ductwork Identification: 1.Access Doors: Provide stenciled or plastic-laminate type signs on each access door in ductwork and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and other maintenance and operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information. C.Piping System Identification: 1.General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow: a.Stenciled markers, including color-coded background band or rectangle, and contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend color band or rectangle 2" beyond ends of lettering. IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 b.Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this section. c.Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever continuous color-coded painting of piping is provided. 2.Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations. a.Near each valve and control device. b.Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. c.Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures. d.At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of concealed piping. e.Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. f.Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. g.On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. D.Valve Identification: 1.General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, and shut-off valves at terminal devices and similar rough-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system. E.Equipment Identification: 1.General: Provide equipment identification for all equipment including air handling units, terminal units, fans, pumps, boilers, heaters, control panels, heat exchangers, condensing units, and chillers. 2.Labeling: All equipment shall be labeled as per construction document plan marks or as designated by Owner. 3.Provide identification by means of nameplates or stenciled painting as appropriate. a.For equipment with factory furnished casing, identification shall be by adhesive fixed name plates. b.Field insulated items, such as heat exchangers may be identified by plastic pipe markers or stenciled lettering. END OF SECTION 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 0593-TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCINGFOR HVAC PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicableto work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Extent of testing, adjusting and balancing work is indicated by requirements of this section, and also by drawings and schedules, and is defined to include, but is not necessarily limited to, air distribution systems and associated equipment and apparatus of HVACwork. The work consists of setting speed and volume (including pulley changes as required) adjusting facilities provided for systems, recording data, conducting tests, preparing and submitting reports, and recommending modifications to work as required by contract documents. B.Component types of testing, adjusting and balancing specified in this section includes the following as applied to HVACequipment: 1.Air Systems: a.Air Handling Units b.Ductwork Systems 2.WaterSystems: a.Coils b.HVAC Piping Systems C.The Heating and Air Conditioning Contractor shall provide a complete and operating HVAC system and shall cooperate with the balancing agency by: 1.Installing balancing dampers as required by the Drawings and Specifications and requested by the Testing and Balancing Contractor. 2.Putting complete system into operation during duration of balancing period. 3.Providing up-to-date set of Drawings and advising immediately of any changes made to the system during construction. 4.Providing labor and equipment and cost of performing corrections, such as dampers, belts, etc., as required without undue delay. 5.Providing complete submittal information for all HVACequipment, complete with pertinent engineering information. 1.03REFERENCES A.Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) -National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance. B.ASHRAE -HVAC Applications Handbook: Chapter 34, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing. (Most recent edition). C.NationalEnvironmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) -Procedural Standards for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Tester: A firm with at least 3 years of successful testing, adjusting and balancing experience on projects with testing and balancing requirements similar to those required for this project, who is not Installer of system to be tested and is otherwise independent of project. B.Test Equipment Criteria: The basic instrumentation requirements and accuracy/calibration required by AABC, National Standards or by NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems. C.All testing and balancing contractors are to be approved by the Design Professionalbefore bidding. The contractors approved to date are: 1.Precision Test and Balance Clive, Iowa (515) 288-2332 2.Systems Management and Balancing Waukee, Iowa (515) 987-2825 3.River Place Technologies East Moline, Illinois (309)796-0800 4.Integrity Testing and Balancing Madrid, Iowa (515) 250-6055 5.Omega Test and Balance Adel, Iowa (515) 729-6046 1.05JOB CONDITIONS A.Do not proceed with testing, adjusting and balancing work until work has been completed and is operable. Ensure that there is no latent residual work still to be completed. B.Do not proceed until work scheduled for testing, adjusting and balancing is clean and free from debris, dirt and discarded building materials. 1.06SUBMITTALS A.TAB Agency Qualifications: Submit names and qualifications of company officers and job supervisor. Submit list of proposed test equipment and sample report format indicating all measurements to be taken. These shall be submitted to and reviewed by Design Professional prior to commencing work. B.The test-and-balance report shall be complete with logs, data, and records as required herein. All logs, data, and records shall be typed on white bond paper and bound. The report shall be certified accurate and complete by the balancing agency's certified test-and-balance engineer. C.Three (3) copiesof the test-and-balance report are required and shall be submitted to Design Professional. D.The report shall contain the required data in a format selected by Balancing Contractor. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 E.Report shall include the following information: (For all references to "design", specific information from shop drawings shall be incorporated.) 1.Air Moving Equipment: a.Location b.Manufacturer and Model c.Supply, return and exhaust, air flow, design and actual d.Outside air flow, design and actual (where applicable) e.Inlet, discharge, and total static pressure, design and actual f.Fan RPM, design and actual g.Static pressure across the coil section with the face and bypass damper in both the face and bypass positions (where face and bypass dampers are provided). 2.V-Belt Drive: a.Identification/location b.Required driven RPM c.Driven sheave, diameter and RPM d.Belt, size and quantity e.Motor sheave, diameter and RPM 3.Duct Traverse: a.System zone/branch b.Duct size and area c.Velocity and airflow, design and actual d.Duct static pressure e.Air temperature and correction factor (if applicable) 4.Air Terminal Unit Data: a.Identification/number and location b.Manufacturer and model c.Size d.Minimum static pressure, design and actual e.Maximum air flows, design and actual f.Minimum air flow, design and actual 5.Central Station Cooling and Heating Coil Data: a.Identification/number b.Location and service c.Air flow, design and actual d.Entering and leaving air DB and WB temperatures, design and actual e.Water flow and pressure drop, design and actual f.Entering and leaving water temperature, design and actual g.Air pressure drop, design and actual h.Differential pressure across balancing valves. 6.Terminal Unit Heating and Cooling Coil Data a.Identification/number b.Manufacturer and model c.Entering and leaving DB temperature, design and actual d.Entering andleaving water temperature, design and actual e.Water flow, design and actual f.Differential pressure across balancing valves. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01PATCHING MATERIALS A.Except as otherwise indicated, use same products as used by original Installer for patching holes ininsulation, ductwork and housings which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, including access for test instruments, attaching jibs, and similar purposes. 1.At Tester's option, plastic plugs with retainers may be used to patch drilled holes in ductwork and housings. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01TESTING A.Examine installed work and conditions under which testing is to be done to ensure that work has been completed, cleaned and is operable. Do not proceed with TAB work until unsatisfactory conditions have been correctedin manner acceptable to Tester. Before initiating balancing work, Contractor shall verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the following: 1.Equipment is operable and in a safe and normal condition. 2.Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3.Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4.Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5.Duct systems are clean of debris. 6.Correct fan rotation. 7.Volume dampers are in place and open. 8.Coil fins have been cleaned and combed. 9.Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10.Air outlets are installed and connected. 11.Duct system leakage has been minimized. 12.Hydronic systems have been flushed, filled, and vented. 13.Correct pump rotation. 14.Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 15.Service and balance valves are open. B.Test, adjust and balance environmental systems and components, as indicated, in accordance with procedures outlined in applicable standards. C.Coordinate TAB procedures with any phased construction completion requirements for the project. Systems serving completed phases of the project will require TAB for such phases prior to partial final inspections. D.Allow sufficient time in construction schedule for TAB and submission of reports prior to partial final inspections. E.Prepare report of test results, including instrumentation calibration reports, in format recommended by applicable standards.Draft report shall be sent to Design Professionalfor review prior to issuance to Owner. F.Patch holes in insulation, ductwork and housings, which have been cut or drilled for test purposes, in manner recommended by original Installer. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 G.Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, fan speed control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings at completion of TAB work. Provide markings with paint or other suitable permanent identification materials. H.Prepare a report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when system cannot be successfully balanced; including, where necessary, modifications which exceed requirements of contract documents for HVACwork. I.The test and balance agency shall perform the following tests and balance theair system in accordance with the following requirements (provide written substantiating data): 1.Test, adjust and record all blower RPM at design requirements. 2.Make pitot tube transverse of main supply ducts and obtain design CFM at all fans and blowers. 3.Test and record all system static pressures, suction and discharge. 4.Test and adjust all systems for design CFM of recirculated air. 5.Test and adjust all systems for design CFM of outside air. 6.Test and record entering and leaving air temperatures (DB and WB); all air units. 7.Adjust all zones to proper design CFM, supply and return. 8.Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating. 9.In cooperation with the control manufacturer's representative, set adjustments of all controllers to operate as specified, indicated and/or noted. 10.Flow Rate Tolerances: a.Applications which do not require differential pressure control: -10% to +10%. b.Minimum outside air: 0 to +10% J.The test and balance agency shall perform the following tests and balance the water system in accordance with the following requirements (provide written substantiating data): 1.Before setting pump capacities, check the following items: a.Automatic fill valve setting and strainer b.Expansion tank level c.Cleanliness of system water d.Make certain all pump strainers are clean e.Check air vents at coils and high points of system 2.Measure circulating pump capacities by differential pressure measurements, amperage and brake horsepower method using the pump manufacturer's capacity curve. Position all automatic valves, hand valves and balancing cocks for full flow through coils, convertors, etc. during pump adjustment. Use only calibrated test gauges for pump adjustment; the use of pressure gauges installed with the system will not be allowed. Adjust triple duty valve as required to provide minimum differential pressure required for most remote automatic flow control valve. 3.Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system. 4.Balance system with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements. For coils with 3-way control valves, set bypass balancing cock to provide total flow when control valve is in 100% bypass position equal to total flow when control valve is 100% open to coil. 5.Determine minimum differential pressure setpoint required to maintain flow at all water coils. Coordinate final setting with Temperature Control Contractor. TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593-5 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 6.Coordinate the setting of controls to maintain coil water inlet design temperatures, with coil valves positioned for full flow through coil during adjustment. Balance individual water coils at full flow to maintain temperature differential specified. 7.Mark settings of all balancing cocks at required positions. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point. For automatic flow control valves: Record differential pressure and verify within operating range of valve. 8.Flow Rate Tolerances: a.Heating water pumps and coils: -10% to +10% K.Where balancer has a question regarding appropriate system configuration for balancing, balancer should contact Design Professionalfor clarification. END OF SECTION 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593-6 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 230700-HVACINSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 230010 -HVACGeneral Provisionsare applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to install insulation to all hot and cold surfaces of piping, ductwork, tanks, fittings and other surfaces as required by the drawings and thissection. B.Insulation shall include insulating materials, jackets, adhesive, mastic coatings, tie wire and other materials as required to complete the insulating work. 1.03DEFINITIONS A.Conditioned Space: an area inside the building which is heated and/or cooled. B.Tempered Space: an area inside the building which is not directly heated or cooled, but is adjacent to a heated or cooled space with no insulation separating the two spaces(e.g., ceiling plenums). C.Untempered Space: an area inside the building which is not conditioned and is not tempered (e.g., attic spaces). D.Exterior: An area outside the building (e.g.,roof mounted items). 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.NFPA Compliance: Insulating materials, jackets, mastics, etc., shall meet flame spread and smoke developed ratings in accordance with NFPA-90A. Flame spread rating of not more than 25, smoke developed rating of not more than 50 as tested by ANSI/ASTM E84 (UL 723) (NFPA 255) method. All accessory items such as PVC jacketing and fittings, adhesive, mastic, cement tape and cloth shall have the same component ratings as specified above. B.Installation of insulation materials shall be in accordance to the latest edition of MICA/NIAC National Commercial & Industrial Standards for the appropriate material application. C.NFPA Compliance: Fire Barrier Duct Wrap systems shall meet requirements of NFPA 96 for grease duct application. 1.05SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of HVACinsulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, thickness, and furnished accessories for each HVACsystem requiring insulation. B.Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of HVACinsulation. Includethis data in maintenance manual. C.Certifications: Submit certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with these specifications and governing regulations. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength. HVAC INSULATION 23 0700-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.06DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products. B.Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and HVACdamage. Do not install damaged insulation; remove from project site. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.Insulating Materials 1.Owens/Corning Fiberglass Corp. 2.Armacell. 3.Pittsburgh Corning Corp. 4.CertainTeed Corp. 5.Knauf Fiber Glass 6.John's-Manville Corp. 7.Aeroflex B.Mastics and adhesives as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2.02PIPE INSULATION A.Type 'A': Preformed sectional heavy density fiberglass insulation and factory applied vapor barrier, all service jacket with pressure sensitive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Suitable for operating temperatures from 0 to +850 deg. F. Thermal conductivity shall be no greater than0.23 Btu-in/hr-sq.ft.-deg F @ 75deg. F mean temperature. Water vapor permeance of .02 perms. Equal to Owens Corning 25 ASJ/SSL. 1.Where insulation is exposed to weather outdoors it shall be covered with an aluminum or stainless steel weatherproof jacket 0.016" thick and sealed. 2.Where insulation is exposed in indoor occupied space, it shall be covered with 30 mil PVC jacket equal to Johns Manville Zeston. B.Type 'B': Flexible elastomeric extruded pipe covering, 6 pound density, 0.27 K factor, water vapor permeance of 0.20 perms. Suitable for temperature from -40 deg. F to +220 deg. F. Equal toArmacell, APArmaflex, joints sealed with adhesive as recommended by insulation manufacturer. Exposed outdoor insulation to be finished with two coats of ArmacellArmaflex finish. C.Type ‘C’: Preformed rigid hydrous calcium silicate insulation. Mechanically fastened by wiring in place using 16 gauge wire on 9” centers and covered with suitable jacketing for indoor or outdoor application. Suitable for operating temperatures +200 to +1200 deg. F. Thermal conductivity shall be no greater than 0.42 Btu-in/hr-sq.ft.-deg F @ 200deg. F mean temperature. Equal to Owens-Corning Kaylo asbestos-free pipe insulation. 2.03FITTING INSULATION A.Type 'A1': Fittings: Insulate with mitered segments of same insulating material as for adjacent pipe covering, or withpre-molded fiberglass wired in place and covered with all-service jacket or low smoke PVC fitting covers. Valve bodies, strainer bodies, flanges, etc.: insulate with single or multiple layers of same insulating material as for adjacent pipe covering, wired in place and covered with all-service jacket. HVAC INSULATION 23 0700-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B.Type 'B1': Fittings: Insulate fittings, valve bodies, strainer bodies, etc., with mitercut pipe insulation or sheet insulation of same material as pipe covering. C.Type ‘C1’: Fittings: Insulate fittingswith mitered segments of pipe insulation of same material as pipe covering, wired in place and finished with a 1/4” layer of insulating cement. Valve bodies, strainer bodies, flanges, etc.: insulate with single or multiple layers of same insulating material as pipe covering, wired in place and finished with 1/4” layer of insulating cement. 2.04DUCT INSULATION A.Duct Covering: Certain-Teed Ultralite Duct Wrap with Foil Scrim Kraft vapor barrier facing, one (1) pound per cubic foot density. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01GENERAL A.Use only experienced applicators regularly engaged in the trade. Rough work will be rejected. Application details shall be in accordance with the insulating materials supplier's recommendations except where a higher standard is specified. All surface finishes shall be extended in such a manner as to protect all raw edges, cuts and surfaces of insulation. B.All piping shall be insulated unless specifically noted otherwise. Piping not noted in the table below shall be insulated with thicknesses matchingASHRAE 90.1 based on the fluid temperatures. 3.02PIPE INSULATION APPLICATION ServiceType Insulation and Thickness * Above Ground Piping Hot water heating lines, Type A and A1: supply and return.1-1/4” and smaller -1-1/2” thick 1-1/2” andlarger -2” thick Type C and C1: 1-1/4” and smaller –2-1/2” thick 1-1/2” to 6” –3” thick 8” and larger –4” thick Refrigeration piping (except liquid lines)Type B and B1: 3/4” and smaller –3/4” thick 1” to 2” –1” thick 2-1/2” and larger –1-1/2” thick Condensate drain linesType A and A1: 1” thick for all pipe sizes. *For piping exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures, increase thickness by 1/2” 3.03PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION A.Do not insulate the following: 1.Valve bonnets 2.Unions in hot piping HVAC INSULATION 23 0700-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3.TC valve operators 4.Hot piping within radiation enclosures or unit cabinet. 5.Cold piping within unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan. 6.Heating piping beyond control valve, located within heated space. 7.Condensate piping between steam trap and union. 8.Preinsulated expansion joints B.Inspect all piping and equipment before applying insulation to insure the installing contractor has completed all leak tests, and that all surfaces are clean, dry and ready for application of insulation. C.Covering for "cold" pipes shall pass unbroken through hanger clevises, sleeves, etc. All details of covering for cold surfaces shall be such that continuous covering with unbroken vapor barrier and uncompressed insulation is provided as required toprevent condensation. The same covering and hanging detail shall be used for pipes connecting to vibrating equipment or carrying pulsating pressures to avoid metal contact between pipes and hangers. D.Insulation at removable heads, manhole covers, strainer plugs, and other access points shall be fabricated in such a manner that it can be readily removed without damage to the insulation. Removable insulation shall have a vapor proof cover fabricated so as to allow it to be resealed to the equipment vapor barrier. 3.04DUCT INSULATION APPLICATION A.Unless noted otherwise, all ductwork and accessories shall be either lined or coveredas scheduled on plans. If type or thickness is not indicated, it shall be 1-1/2” covering. 3.05DUCT COVERING INSTALLATION A.Inspect allductwork and equipment before applying insulation to insure the installing contractor has completed all leak tests, and that all surfaces are clean, dry and ready for application of insulation. B.Covering shall be cut slightly longer than circumference of duct to insure full thickness at corners. All insulation shall be adhered with edges tightly banded, and shall be adhered to duct with fire resistant adhesive. Adhesive shall be applied so that insulation conforms to duct surfaces uniformly and firmly. C.In addition to the adhesive, the insulation shall be additionally secured to the bottom of all ducts 18" or wider by means of grip nails and speed clips. The protruding ends of the pins shall be cut off flush after the speed clips have been applied. The vapor barrier facing shall be thoroughly sealed with a vapor barrier mastic and tape where the pins have pierced through. D.Insulation for "cold" ducts and accessories shall pass unbroken through hangers, sleeves, fire dampers, flexible connectors, reheat coils, etc. as required to prevent condensation. All details of covering for cold surfaces shall be such that continuous covering with unbroken vapor barrier and uncompressed insulation is provided. The same covering and hanging detail shall be used for ducts connecting to vibrating equipment or carrying pulsating pressures to avoid metal contact between ducts and hangers. Insulation Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with equipment suppliers as required to ensure continuous covering of unlined equipment components, i.e. VAV terminal unit supply collar, fan coil unit discharge, etc. E.Insulation at all access points shall be fabricated in such a manner that it can be readily removed without damage to the insulation. Removable insulation shall have a vapor proof cover fabricated so as to allow it to be resealed to the equipment vapor barrier. END OF SECTION 230700 HVAC INSULATION 23 0700-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 0900-INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Contractor shall furnish and installDDC system including all necessary hardware and all operating and applications software necessary to perform the control sequences of operation as called for in this specification. New DDC system shall be an extension of existing Schneider Electric I/A Series BACnet DDC system. B.Upon completion of system extension, the DDC system shall be a complete system designed for use on Intranets and the Internet. This functionality shall extend into the equipment rooms. Primary controllers located in equipment rooms and shall be fully IT compatible devices that mount and communicate directly on the IT infrastructure existing in the facility. Contractor shall be responsible forcoordination with the owner’s environment without disruption to any of the other activities taking place on that LAN. C.The DDC system work shall result in a complete, fully functional, commissioned DDC system that meets the intent of this specification and the sequences of operation. This work shall include, but not be limited to the provision of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, software, software licenses, software configurations and database entries, interfaces, wiring, tubing, installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, samples, submittals, testing, verification, training services, permits and licenses, transportation, shipping, handling, administration, supervision, management, insurance, temporary protection, cleaning, cutting and patching, warranties and services. D.The control system shall be installed by competent control mechanics and electricians employed by DDC Contractor. DDC Contractor is responsible for all work performed by their subcontractors. E.Manage and coordinate the DDC system work in a timely manner in consideration of the Project schedules. Coordinate cooperatively with the associated work of other trades so as to assist the progress and not impede or delay the work of associated trades. F.Provide support and coordination with Testing and Balancing (TAB) and Validation Contractors for all interfaces between controls and TAB/validation scope of work. Provide all devices, such as portable operator terminals for TAB use in completing TAB procedures. G.All interlocking, wiring and installation of control devices associated with the equipment listed below shall be provided under this contract. When the DDC system is fully installed and operational, DDC Contractor and representatives of Owner will review and checkout the system. At that time, DDC Contractor shall demonstrate the operation of the system and prove that it complies with the intent of the drawings and specifications. H.All work performed under this section of the specifications will comply with all codes, laws and governing bodies. If the drawings and/or specifications are in conflict with governing codes, Contractor shall submit a proposal with appropriate modifications to the project to meet code restrictions. If this specification and associated drawings exceed governing code requirements, the specification will govern. Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary construction permits and licenses. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.03WORK BY OTHERS A.The following incidental work shall be furnished by the designated under the supervision of the DDC Contractor. 1.HVACPiping Contractor Shall: a.Install automatic valves that are specified to be supplied by DDC Contractor. b.Install all pipe mounted DDC items including wells, paddle switches and differential pressure switches, includingtheir isolation valves and associated tubing. 2.Sheet Metal Contractor Shall: a.Install all automatic dampers furnished by DDC Contractor. b.Provide necessary blank-off plates (safing) required to install dampers that are smaller than the duct size. c.Assemble multiple section dampers with required interconnecting linkages and extend required number of shafts through duct for external mounting of damper motors. d.Provide access door or other approved means of access through ducts for service to control equipment. e.Install airflow measuring stations. 3.Coordinate with Electrical Contractor: a.The installation of all line voltage power wiring by Division 26. 1.04ELECTRIC WIRING A.All electric wiring and wiring connections required for the installation of the DDC system, as herein specified, shall be provided by DDC Contractor unless specifically shown on the electrical drawings or called for in the electrical specifications. Line voltage wiring which is the responsibility of DDC Contractor includes but is not limited to: power for unit mounted controllers and line voltage control devices, freezestat wiring, line voltage thermostats, and motor starter interlocks as required by sequence of operation. B.All control wiring in finished spaces is to be routed concealed in walls or above ceilings unless specifically noted otherwise. Concealed control wiring,where accessible,may be installed without conduit. All concealed control wiring which is not accessible shall be routed in blue conduit. Control wiring in unfinished spaces may be routed exposed but shall be in blue conduit. Wiring in ducts, plenums and other air handling spaces shall be specifically listed for the use. Installation shall comply with all code requirements. C.Wiring shall comply with the requirements of local and national electrical codes. 1.05QUALIFICATIONS A.All bidders must be DDC Contractors in the business of installing direct digital control building automation systems for a minimum of 3 years. B.The DDC system shall be provided by a single source manufacturer offering a full line of controls. This system shall be furnished, engineered, and installed by the manufacturers local factory owned branch office or the manufacturers locally authorized representative. DDC Contractor shall have factory trained technicians to provide instruction, routine maintenance, and emergency service within 48 hours upon receipt of request. C.Control system components shall be the manufacturer’s latest standard of design at the time of bid and in conformance with the following applicablestandards for products specified: 1.American Society for Testing and Materials, ASTM. 2.Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, IEEE. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3.National Electrical Manufacturers Association, NEMA. 4.Underwriters Laboratory, UL (UL 916). 5.FCC Regulation, Part 15, Section 156. 6.National Fire Protection Association, NFPA. 7.Local building codes. 1.06SUBMITTALS A.The following shall be submitted for approval: 1.DDC Contractor shall submit schematic drawings for the entire control system for review and approval before work shall begin. Included in the submittal drawings shall be a one page diagram depicting the system architecture complete with a communications riser. Drawings shall include point-to-point wiring diagrams and must show all temperature controls, start-stop arrangement for each piece of equipment, equipment interlocks, wiring terminal numbers and any special connection information required for properly controlling the HVACequipment. At a minimum, submit the following: a.DDC network architecture diagrams including all controllers and interconnections. b.Schematics, sequences and flow diagrams. c.Points schedule for each real point in the DDC, including: tag, point type, system name and display units. d.Detailed bill of material list for each controller, identifying quantity, part number, description, and optional features. e.Control damper schedule including a separate line for each damper and a column for each of the damper attributes, including: code number, fail position, damper type, damper operator, blade type, bearing type, seals, duct size, damper size, mounting, and actuator type. f.Control valve schedules including a separate line for each valve and a column for each of the valve attributes: code number, configuration, fail position, pipe size, valve size, body configuration, close off pressure, capacity, valve CV, calculated CV, design pressure, actual pressure, and actuator type. 2.The submittals shall include manufacturers catalog data describing each item of control equipment or component provided and installed for the project. 3.The submittals shall include a specification compliance analysis for review and approval before work shall begin. The compliance document shall address each paragraph of the specification by indicating COMPLY, EXCEED, or EXCEPTION. Do notindicate COMPLY unless the proposed system exactly meets the paragraph requirement. If EXCEED or EXCEPTION is indicated, then provide a clear and concise explanation of the variance from the specifications and the net effect this would have on the specified system performance. 1.07PROTECTION OF SOFTWARE RIGHTS A.Prior to delivery of software, the Owner and the party providing the software will enter into a software license agreement with provisions for the following: 1.Limiting use of software to equipment provided under these specifications. 2.Limiting copying. 3.Preserving confidentiality. 4.Prohibiting transfer to a third party. 1.08PRE-PROGRAMMNG DESIGN REVIEW MEETING A.Prior to starting programming, a design review meeting shall be scheduled with the Design Professional.The agenda of this meeting will be to discuss the design intent, review all systems requiring control, and answer any questions the Temperature Controls Contractor may have. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are as follows: 1.Schneider Electric I/A Series –The Baker Group B.All control equipment shall be the product of one manufacturer. 2.02SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE A.The complete electronic DDC system shall be comprised of the followinglevels of control devices. 1.System Workstation includes the hardware and software necessary for an operator to interface with the control system. 2.Network Controller(s) are used for high level global programming functions and system networking. 3.Local Controllers are for control of large primary HVACsystems such as air handling systems, heating hot water systems and chilled water systems. 4.Zone Controllers are dedicated for specific equipment such as VAV boxes, fancoils, and heat pump controls. 5.Network thermostats dedicated to specific equipment such as VAV boxes, fan coils, or heat pumps, etc. 6.Field devices include but are not limited to electronic sensors, valves, actuators, switches, relays, and transducers. 2.03OPERATOR INTERFACE A.General: The DDC operator interface shall be user friendly, readily understood and shall make maximum use of colors, graphics, icons, embedded images, animation, text based information and data visualization techniques to enhance and simplify the use and understanding of the DDC system by authorized users at the OI. 1.User access to the DDC system shall be protected by a flexible and Owner redefinable software-based password access protection. Password protection shall be multi-level and partitionable to accommodate thevaried access requirements of the different user groups. Provide the means to define unique access privileges for each individual authorized user. Also provide the means to establish general password groups to which an individual will then be assigned. Once assigned to the group each individual will assume all the capabilities and restrictions of that group. Provide the means to on-line manage password access control under the control of a master password. 2.The operator interface shall be able to combine data from any and all of the system components in a single browser window. This shall include historical data stored on a server. 3.The operator interface shall incorporate comprehensive support for functions including, but not necessarily limited to, thefollowing: a.User access for selective information retrieval and control command execution b.Monitoring and reporting c.Alarm, non-normal, and return to normal condition annunciation d.Selective operator override and other control actions e.Information archiving, manipulation, formatting, display and reporting f.DDC internal performance supervision and diagnostics g.On-line access to user HELP menus h.On-line access to current DDC as-built records and documentation INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 i.Means for the controlled re-programming, re-configurationof DDC operation and for the manipulation of DDC database information in compliance with the prevailing codes, approvals and regulations for individual DDC applications. 4.Provide DDC reports and displays making maximized use of simple English language descriptions and readily understood acronyms, abbreviations and the like to assist user understanding and interpretation. All text naming conventions shall be consistent in their use and application throughout the DDC. B.Web Interface 1.The system shall be capable of supporting clients using a standard web browser such as Internet Explorer™.Systems requiring additional software (to enable a standard Web browser) are not acceptable. 2.The web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the graphical user interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shallnot be permitted. 3.The web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions: a.User log-on identification and password shall be required. Security using Java authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall beimplemented. b.Graphical screens developed for the operator interface shall be the same screens used for the web browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the OI shall be supported by the web browser interface. c.HTML programming shall not berequired to display system graphics or data on a web page. HTML editing of the web page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific look or format. d.Real-time values displayed on a web page shall update automatically without requiring a manual “refresh” of the web page. e.Users shall have administrator-defined access privileges. f.The system shall provide the capability to specify a users home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to just their defined home page. From the home page links to other views, or pages in the system, shall be possible if allowed by the system administrator. g.Graphic screens on the web browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link. C.Alarms: Alarms shall be routed directly from network controllers to PCs and servers. It shall be possible for specific alarms from specific points to be routed to specific PCs and servers. The alarm management portion of the OI software shall, at the minimum, provide the following functions: 1.Log date and time of alarm occurrence. 2.Generate a “pop-up” window, with audible alarm, informing a user that an alarm has been received. 3.Allow a user, with the appropriate security level, to acknowledge, temporarily silence, or discard an alarm. 4.Provide an audit trail on hard drive for alarms by recording user acknowledgment, deletion, or disabling of an alarm. The audit trail shall include the name of the user, the alarm, the action taken on the alarm, and a time/date stamp. 5.Provide the ability to direct alarms to an e-mail address or alpha-numeric pager. This must be provided in addition to the pop up window described above. Systems which use e-mail and pagers as the exclusivemeans of annunciating alarms are not acceptable. 6.Any attribute of any object in the system may be designated to report an alarm. 7.The DDC shall annunciate diagnostic alarms, at a minimum, indicating system failures and non-normal operating conditions INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-5 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 D.Reports: Reports shall be generated and directed to one or more of the following: Operator interface displays, printers, or archive at the user’s option. As a minimum, the system shall provide the following reports: 1.All points in the DDC system. 2.All points in each DDC application. 3.All points currently in alarm in a DDC application. 4.All points locked out in a DDC application. 5.All DDC schedules. 6.All user defined and adjustable variables, schedules, interlocks, etc. 7.DDC diagnostic and system status reports. E.Dynamic Color Graphics: The system shall allow for the creation of user defined, color graphic displays for the viewing of HVACand electrical systems, or building schematics. These graphics shall contain point information from the database including any attributes associated with the point (engineering units, etc.). In addition operators shall be able to command equipment or change setpoints from a graphic through the use of the mouse. Requirements of the color graphic subsystem include: 1.An unlimited number of graphic displays shall be able to be generated and executed. 2.Graphics shall be based on Scalar Vector Graphic (SVG) technology. 3.Values of real time attributes displayed on the graphics shall be dynamic and updated on the displays. 4.The graphic displays shall be able to display and provide animation based on real-time DDC data that is acquired, derived, or entered. 5.The user shall be able to change values (setpoints) and states in system controlled equipment directly from the graphic display. 6.Provide a graphic editing tool that allows for the creation and editing of graphic files. It shall be possible to edit the graphics directly while they are on line, or at an off line location for later downloading to the controller. 7.DDC system shall be provided with a complete user expandable symbol library containing all of the basic symbols used to represent components of a typical DDC system. Implementing these symbols in a graphic shall involve dragging and dropping them from the library to the graphic. 8.The following list of graphics, at a minimum, shall be provided: a.Floor plans showing room numbers and temperature sensor locations are to be provided that will alarm when a room is off their respective zone temperature and set point. The floor plans shall also be linked to a screen to show the equipment serving that particular room/zone. b.Provide a graphic screen for each type of equipment connected to the DDC system. At a minimum, the following shall be visible from the OI: 1)VAV Boxes -discharge air temperature, zone temperature, set-point, airflow, damper position, reheat valve position 2)RTU-supply/return fans on/off/speed/status, dirty filter switch, outdoor air temperature, mixed air temperature, return air temperature, discharge air temperature, low limitalarm, heat/cool stage, damper positions, static pressure F.Schedules: It shall be possible to configure and download from the operator interface schedules for any of the controllers on the network. 1.The system shall provide multiple schedule input forms for automatic DDC time-of-day scheduling and override scheduling of DDC operations. At a minimum, the following spreadsheet types shall be accommodated: a.Weekly schedules. b.Temporary override schedules. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-6 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 c.Special “Only active if today is a holiday” schedules. d.Monthly schedules. 2.Schedules shall be provided for each system or sub-system in the DDC system. Each schedule shall include all command able points residing within the system. Each point may have a unique schedule of operation relative to the system use schedule, allowing for sequential starting and control of equipment within the system. Scheduling and rescheduling of points shall be accomplished easily via the system schedule spreadsheets. 3.Monthly calendars for a 12-month period shall be provided that allow for simplified scheduling of holidays and special days in advance. Holidays and special days shall be user-selected with the pointing device or keyboard, and shall automatically reschedule equipment operation as previously defined on the weekly schedules. G.Historical trending and data collection: Trend and store point history data for all DDC points and values as selected by the user. The trend data shall be stored in a manner that allows custom queries and reports using industry-standard software tools. At a minimum, provide the capability to perform statistical functions on the historical database: 1.Average. 2.Arithmetic mean. 3.Maximum/minimum values. 4.Range –difference between minimum and maximum values. 5.Standard deviation. 6.Sum of all values. 7.Variance. 2.04NETWORK CONTROLLERS A.General: The network controller shall be a microprocessor based, multi-tasking real time system controller that provides advanced system programming, uplink and downlink communications, polling and other supervisory functions for zone and local controllers. B.Each network controller shall be classified as a BACnet compatible device, supporting the BACnet BuildingController (B-BC) profile. Controllers that support a lesser profile such as B-AAC are not acceptable. NRCs shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Advanced Application Controllers (B-BC). C.Hardware Specifications 1.Operating Environment: The controller shall be capable of operating in an environment of 32 to 122 deg F and 10 to 90% relativehumidity non-condensing. 2.Memory: Both the operating system of the controller, plus the application program for the controller, shall be stored in non-volatile, FLASH memory. Controllers shall contain enough memory for the current application, plus required history logging, plus a minimum of 20% additional free memory. 3.Communication Ports: Each network controller shall provide communication to both the Workstation(s) and the field buses. An on-board Ethernet port shall be provided. 4.Stand-Alone: The controller shall be a true no-host system that does not require a PC or "Host" computer to perform any control functions or communications. 5.Modular Expandability: The system shall employ a modular I/O design to allow easy expansion. Input and output capacityis to be provided through plug-in modules of various. It shall be possible to combine I/O modules as desired to meet the I/O requirements for individual control applications. 6.Real Time Clock (RTC): Each network controller shall include a battery-backed,real time clock, accurate to 10 seconds per day. The RTC shall provide the following: time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. The system shall automatically correct for daylight savings time and leap years. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-7 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 7.Power Supply: The power supply for thenetwork controller shall be auto sensing, 120- 220VAC, 60Hz power, with a tolerance of +/-20%. Line voltage below the operating range of the system shall be considered outages. The controller shall contain over voltage surge protection, and require no additional AC power signal conditioning. a.Automatic Restart After Power Failure: Upon restoration of power after an outage, the network controller shall automatically and without human intervention: update all monitored functions; resume operation based on current, synchronized time and status, and implement special start-up strategies as required. b.Battery backup: The network controller shall include an on-board battery to back up the controller’s RAM memory. The battery shall have a shelf life of over 5 years, and provide accumulated backup of all RAM and clock functions for at least 3 years. In the case of a power failure, the network controller shall first try to restart from the RAM memory. If that memory is corrupted or unusable, then the network controller shall restart itself from its application program stored in its FLASH memory. 8.Field communication ports shall be individually electrically isolated to protect against transients, spikes, and power surges. The ports shall be optically isolated from each other, the controller circuit board and from power wiring. Optical isolation shall be provided either as an integral component to the controller or provided as a separate interface device between the controller and field wiring. 9.Upgrades: Include all future controller firmware at no additional cost to the system owner for a 3 year period after system acceptance. 10.Failure of any system controller shall be audibly and visually annunciated on a system workstation. D.Network Controller Software 1.General: The network controller shall contain FLASH memory to store both the resident operating system and the application software. There will be no restrictions placed on the type of application programs in the system. Each network controller shall be capable of parallel processing, executing all control programs simultaneously. Any program may affect the operation of any other program. Each program shall have the full access of all I/O facilities of the processor. This execution of control function shall not be interrupted due to normal user communications including interrogation, program entry, printout of the program for storage, etc. 2.User Programming Language: The application software shall be user programmable. This includes all strategies, sequences of operation, control algorithms, parameters, and setpoints. The source program shall be English language-based and programmable by the user. The language shall be structured to allow for the easy configuration of control programs, schedules, alarms, reports, telecommunications, local displays, mathematical calculations, passwords, and histories. The language shall be self-documenting. Users shall be able to place comments anywhere in the body of a program. Program listings shall be configurable by the user in logical groupings. Controllers that use a “canned” program method will not be accepted. 3.Programming Functions: The software blocks shall provide all the necessary mathematics, logic, utility, and control functions necessary for proper sequence of control. These functions shall be contained in the network controller operating system to be available in any combination for field programming the unit through RAM memory. a.Proportional, Integral plus Derivative Control (PID) b.Self tuning PID c.Two position control d.Digital filter e.Ratio calculator f.Equipment cycling protection INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-8 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 4.Energy Management Applications: As a minimum, the network controller shall have the ability to, but not be limited to, perform energy management strategies such as: a.Time or event based scheduling b.Calendar/holiday based scheduling c.Temporary schedule overrides d.Adaptive optimum start/stop e.Chiller and boiler reset/optimization f.Demand limiting/load shedding g.Enthalpy switchover (economizer) h.Temperature compensated duty cycling i.CFM tracking j.Tenant billing k.Hot water/outdoor air/chilled water/condenser water reset l.Run time totalization m.Alarm detection and dial out n.Night setback o.Historical trending 5.Passwords: The access software shall provide at least 5 levels of passwords. Each level shall be user definable. 6.Help Menu: On-line location sensitive help shall be provided for each menu item, describing the consequences of making the highlighted menu selection. 7.Login: A user definable login message shall be displayed every time the workstation is connected to a system controller. 8.Alarms: The network controller shall be capable of comparing analog and digital readings to predetermined high and low limits and annunciate each time a value enters or returns from an alarm condition. Unique high and low limits shall be supplied for each analog point in the network. The network shall be capable of suppressing selected alarm reporting when the primary equipment from which the alarm point is based is in the inactive state. The alarm features of the system controller software shall, as a minimum, provide the following: a.Digital, analog, and hi/lo settings and deadband b.Sliding alarm limits c.Conditional alarming d.Alarm inhibiting through feedback loop e.Fluttering alarm suppression f.Separate tailored alarm messages of 70 characters each g.Auto dial of any alarm condition to a minimum of 25 telephone numbers 9.On-Line Testing: The network shall have the capability to allow the operator to design, test, and implement desired control strategies on-line. 10.Communication Diagnostics: The network controller software shall be capable of self- diagnosing failure automatically without necessary query by the operator. In the event of communications failure or limited power failure, the network shall be capable of both notifying a local operator of the specific occurrence, as well as communicating to a remote operator, either by the internet or auto dialing the condition. In addition to automatic self-diagnostics, each network controller shall maintain communications statistics on zone and local controller communications. These statistics shall tabulate total communications attempted versus successful and unsuccessful communications by unit number. An option shall exist to reset communications statistics to zero (0) at any time. 11.Trending: Each network controller shall have the capability to simultaneously trend a minimum of 60 combined analog and digital points. Adjustable sampling intervals for each trend from 60 seconds to 10 days shall be possible. Each trend shall be capable of being automatically started or stopped, based on time of day, externally sensed points, alarms, or a calculated value. Upload of trend data to the system workstation shall be automatically performed at any time during the sampling period. The uploaded trend data shall be fully compatible with Microsoft Excel. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-9 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2.05LOCAL CONTROLLERS A.General: Each HVAC local controller shall be a stand-alone DDC controller. The local controllers shall be a local control loop microprocessor-based controller installed at each HVACsystem; i.e., air handling unit, heating boiler. Each controller shall be fully programmable, contain its own control programs and will continue to operate in the event of a failure or communication loss to its associated network controller. Both the operating system of the controller, plus the application program for the controller, shall be stored in non-volatile, FLASH memory. Controllers shall contain enough memory for the current application, plus required history logging, plus a minimum of 20% additional free memory. All controllers with volatile memory shall have a battery for 72 hour database backup. Each controller shall be addressable by a workstation or a portable service tool. B.Each local controller provided must be a BACnet device, supporting the BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC) profile. Controllers that support a lesser profile such as B-SA are not acceptable. Local controllers shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Advanced Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC). C.Hardware Specifications 1.Scan: Controller shall continuously scan and maintain the most recent data in RAM for retrieval by a remote workstation and by the local controller software programs. 2.Isolation: Control,communication, and power circuits for each controller shall be individually electrically isolated to protect against transients, spikes, and power surges. 3.Database: All field control databasesshall be entered, changed or downloaded to the local controllers via a portable service tool or system workstation. 4.Local Display: The controller shall have a local display and keypad that allows the user to view and change setpoints directly at the controller. 5.Auto-Calibration: All inputs shall feature an auto-calibrate function to eliminate sensing errors. 6.Input/Output Modules: Provide the following input/output capabilities: a.Universal inputs which can accept industry standard analog signals (4-20 Ma, 0-5 VDC, etc.) and binary contact closures. b.Digital outputsmay be latched or momentary contact type. c.Analog outputs shall have a 1% resolution over total output span of 100%. 7.Expandability: For larger controller (16 base inputs and up), provide input and output expansion through the use of plug-in modules. At least two I/O modules must be capable of being added to the base local controller. 8.Automatic Restart After Power Failure: Upon restoration of power after an outage, the controller shall automatically and without human intervention: update all monitored functions; resume operation based on current, synchronized time and status, and implement special start-up strategies as required. 9.Real Time Clock (RTC): All local controllers shall have a real time clock in either hardware or software. The accuracy shallbe within 10 seconds per day. The RTC shall provide the following information: time of day, day, month, year, and day of week. Each local controller shall receive a signal, every hour, over the network from the NRC, which synchronizes all local controllers’ real time clocks. D.Local Controller Software: Provide complete controller software to execute all HVACsystem local loop controls functions. 1.Control Parameters: The software blocks in the local controller shall produce all of the necessary reverse acting and/or direct acting PI signals as required by the control sequence. The proportional and integral values which make up the PI output value shall be readable and modifiable, at the system workstation or the portable service tool to facilitate tuning of control loops. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-10 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2.Networking: Each input, output, or calculation result shall be capable of being assigned to the system controller for system networking. The local controller shall also provide the ability to download and upload configuration data, both locally at the controller and via the DDC communications network. 3.Programming Functions: Provide the following standard DDC loop programming functions: a.Control block programming b.PI or PID control c.Serial load staging d.Binary load staging e.Analog load staging f.Master-submaster routines g.Anti-windup for integrated loops 2.06ZONE CONTROLLERS A.General: Each HVAC zone controller shall be a stand-alone DDC controller. The controller shall include all hardware and software required for communications with the systemcontroller. zone terminal Unless noted otherwise, an individual zone controller shall be dedicated for each device. B.Each local controller provided must be a BACnet device, supporting the BACnet Advanced Application Specific Controller (B-ASC) profile. Controllers that support a lesser profile such as B- SA are not acceptable. Local controllers shall be tested and certified by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) as Advanced Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC). C.Programs: The control program shall reside in the zone controller. The application program shall be maintained in ROM. The default database, ie. setpoints and configuration information, shall be stored in EEPROM. Controllers requiring local setting of potentiometers or dip switches are not acceptable. D.Stand-Alone: Controllers requiring the application or database to be downloaded from a host or share processing with a "master controller" shall not be acceptable. After a power failure the zone controller must run the control application using the current setpoints and configuration. E.Communications: Communication to the system controller shall be 1200-baud asynchronous. F.Input/Output: Each controller shall have a minimum of 8 inputs. Each input shall be usable as a discrete or 0-5 volt analog or digital input. Inputs shall be individually electrically isolated from other inputs, outputs, communications, and power. All inputs shall feature an auto-calibrate function to eliminate sensing errors. G.Each controller shall have a minimum of six digital outputs. Outputs shall be individually electrically isolated from the other outputs, inputs, communications and power. Controller shall be available with a minimum of two (2) analog outputs. H.Connections: All electrical connections shall be made to the combination terminal strip and base assembly. To insure long term reliability, all electrical terminations shall be screw type. I.The logic card, containing all active electrical components, shall be easily installable and removable from the wiring base, without the use of tools or the removal of any electrical wiring. Products that require disconnection of wiring from logic card before removal will be required to supply and install a quick disconnect type inter-connection. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-11 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2.07FIELD DEVICES A.Temperature Sensors: All temperature devices shall use precision thermistors accurate to +/-1 degree F over a range of –30 to 230 degrees F. Space temperature sensors shall be accurate to +/-1degree F over a range of 40 to 100 degrees F. 1.Standard space sensors shall be available in an off white enclosure for mounting on a standard electrical box. Space sensor shall have a portable service tool jack. a.The sensor housing shall feature both a mechanism for adjusting the space temperature setpoint, as well as apush button for selecting after hours operation. b.The sensor shall incorporate either an LED or LCD display for viewing the space temperature, setpoint and other operator selectable parameters. Using built in buttons, operators shall be able to adjust setpoints directly from the sensor. 2.Duct temperature sensors shall incorporate a thermistor bead embedded at the tip of a stainless steel tube. Probe style duct sensors are useable in air handling applications where the coil or duct area is less than 14 square feet. Averaging sensors shall be employed in ducts which are larger than 14 square feet. 3.Immersion sensors shall be employed for measurement of temperature in all chilled and hot water applications as well as refrigerant applications. Thermal wells shall be brass or stainless steel for non-corrosive fluids below 250 degrees F and 300 series stainless steel for all other applications. 4.Freezestat: Duct temperature sensor as described above with appropriate temperature range for the service. 5.A pneumaticsignal shall not be allowed for sensing temperature unless otherwise specified. B.Humidity Sensors: Humidity sensors shall be of the solid-state type using a hydroscopic polymer or thin film capacitive sensing element. The sensor shall vary the output voltage with a change in relative humidity. Sensors shall be available for room, outside air or duct mounting, with a minimum range of 0% -100% +/-3%. C.Differential Pressure Sensor: Differential pressure sensor shall be temperature compensated and shall vary the output voltage with a change in differential pressure. Sensing range shall be suitable for the application with accuracy of +/-2% of range and non-repeatability of +/-0.05%of range. Sensor shall be capable of withstanding up to 150% of rated pressure without damage. 1.Air pressure measurements in the range of 0 to 10” water column will be accurate to +/- 1% using a solid-state sensing element. 2.Differential pressure measurements of liquids or gases shall be accurate to +/-0.5% of range. The housing shall be Nema 4 rated. D.Current Sensors: Current status switches shall be used to monitor fans, pumps, motors and electrical loads. Current switches shall be available in solid and split core models, and offer either a digital or an analog signal to the automation system. E.Measurement of three phase power shall be accomplished with a kW/kWH transducer. This device shall utilize direct current transformer inputs to calculate the instantaneous value (kW) and a pulsed output proportional to the energy usage (kWH). F.Control Valves:Valves shall be packless, modulating, electrically or magnetically actuated. These valves shall have true linear flow characteristics in relationship to valve opening. Control valves shall meet the heating and cooling loads specified, and close off against the differential pressure conditions within the application. Valves should be sized to operate accurately and with stability from 10 to 100% of the maximum design flow. These valves shall carry a full (3) three year parts and labor warranty. This warranty shall cover all required maintenance and failures. In the event of a failure the valve and actuator shall be replaced and reinstalled, by DDC Contractor, at no cost to the building owner. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-12 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.Terminal Unit Valves: Valves shall be sized for a 3 to 5 psi drop. Valve body shall be nickel plated brass, rated at 125 psig and shall have a control rangeability of 100 to 1. Valves 2 inches and smaller shall be screwed type with NPT fittings. Valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be flanged. All two-position valves shall be full port valves. 2.Hot water valves shall be rated to 240 deg. F and 125 psig. Valves shall be sized for a 3 to 5 psi pressure drop. Valve body shall be cast iron with a chrome nickel steel seat and inner valve material. Valves 2 inches and smaller shall be screwed type with NPT fittings. Valves 2-1/2 inches and larger shall be flanged. 3.Butterfly Valves: 2-way and 3-way butterfly valves shall be cast iron valve body, with stainless steel stem, and available with disc seal for bubble-tight shut off. G.Pressure Independent Control Valves: Valves shall be sized for a 3 to 5 psi drop. Valve body shall be cast iron, steel or bronze and rated for 150 psi working pressure. All internal parts shall bestainless steel, steel, Teflon, brass, or bronze. The flow through the valve shall not vary more than +/-5% due to system pressure fluctuations. A flow tag shall be furnished with each valve. The rangeability of the control valves shall be a minimum of100 to 1. H.Control Dampers: Motorized damper, unless otherwise specified elsewhere, shall be furnished by DDC Contractor. Dampers are to be installed by HVAC Contractor under the supervision of DDC Contractor. All blank-off plates and conversions necessary to install smaller than duct size dampers are the responsibility of Sheet Metal Contractor. 1.Damper frames are to be constructed of 13 gauge galvanized sheet steel mechanically joined with linkage concealed in the side channel to eliminate noise asfriction. Compressible spring stainless steel side seals, and acetal or bronze bearings shall also be provided. 2.Damper blade width shall not exceed eight inches and the blade length shall not exceed 48 inches. Seals and 3/8 inch square steel zinc platedpins are required. 3.Provide opposed blade dampers for modulating applications and parallel blade for two position control. I.Damper Actuators: Damper actuators shall be electronic, and shall be direct coupled over the shaft, without the need for connecting linkage. 1.The actuator shall have electronic overload circuitry to prevent damage. For power- failure/safety applications, an internal mechanical, spring return mechanism shall be built into the actuator housing. 2.Actuators shall be available with spring return to the normal position when required. 3.Actuators shall have a position indicator for external indication of damper position. 4.Actuators shall have manual override capability without disconnecting damper linkage. J.Airflow Measuring Stations: Provide a thermal anemometer using instrument grade self heated thermistor sensors with thermistor temperature sensors. 1.The flow station shall operate over a range of 0 to 5,000 feet/min with an accuracy of +/- 2% over 500 feet/min and +/-10 ft/min for reading less than 500 feet/min. 2.The output signal shall be linear with field selectable ranges including 0-5 VDC, 0-10VDC and 4-20 mA. 2.08PORTABLE SERVICE TOOL A.General: Provide a minimum of one (1) portable service tool with the system to allow commissioning, adjustment, and diagnosis of the zone and local controllers. If different types of portable service tools are required for programming of zone controllers versus local controllers, provide one (1) of each type. All programming shall utilize English language descriptors. Manufacturers which utilize portable service tools which require the user to translate HEX decimal, binary, or numerical syntax shall provide one (1) laptop computer with the hardware and software required to meet the specified programming capabilities. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-13 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B.The portable service tool shall have the following capabilities: 1.Readout of each input and output value. 2.Database programming of input and output definitions, setpoints, and control parameters. 3.Manual override of all digital outputs, analog outputs, and application modes (occupied/unoccupied/standby) and control modes (heating/cooling/deadband). 4.Download of all stored database parameters with a single keystroke for cloning typical controllers. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01PROJECT MANAGEMENT A.Provide a project manager who shall, as a part of his duties, be responsible for the following activities: 1.Coordination between Contractor and all other trades, Owner, local authorities and the design team. 2.Scheduling of manpower, material delivery, equipment installation and checkout. 3.Maintenance of construction records such as project scheduling and manpower planning for project coordination and as-built drawings. 3.02INSTALLATION METHODS A.Install systems and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, rough-in drawings and equipment details. Install electrical components and use electrical products complying with requirements of applicable Division-26 sections of these specifications. B.The term "control wiring" is defined to include providing of wire, conduit, and miscellaneous materials as required for mounting and connecting electric or electronic control devices. C.Number-code or color-code conductors, excluding those used for individual zone controls, appropriately for future identification and servicing of control system. D.All line voltage power wiring required because of substitution of equipment specified in this section, shall be provided by this section. 3.03SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE A.General: The system installation shall be complete and tested for properoperation prior to acceptance testing for the Owner's authorized representative. A letter shall be submitted to the Design Professionalrequesting system acceptance. This letter shall certify all controls are installed and the software programs have been completely exercised for proper equipment operation. Acceptance testing will commence at a mutually agreeable time within ten (10) calendar days of request. When the field test procedures have been demonstrated to the Owner's representative, the systemwill be accepted. The warranty period will start at this time. B.Field Equipment Test Procedures: DDC control panels shall be demonstrated via a functional end to end test such that: 1.All output channels shall be commanded (on/off, stop/start, adjust, etc.) and their operation verified. 2.All analog input channels shall be verified for proper operation. 3.All digital input channels shall be verified by changing the state of the field device and observing the appropriate change of displayed value. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-14 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 4.If a point should fail testing, perform necessary repair action and retest failed point and all interlocked points. 5.Automatic control operation shall be verified by introducing an error into the system and observing the proper corrective system response. 6.Selected timeand setpoint schedules shall be verified by changing the schedule and observing the correct response on the controlled outputs. C.As-Built Documentation: After a successful acceptance demonstration, Contractor shall submit as-built drawings of the completed project for final approval. After receiving final approval, supply "3" complete 11 x 17 as-built drawing sets to the Owner. As-built sets printed using high resolution laser printer may be provided on 8-1/2" x 11" drawings. D.Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Submit three copies of operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following: 1.Manufacturer's catalog data and specifications on sensors, transmitters, controllers, control valves, damper actuators, gauges, indicators, terminals, and any miscellaneous components used in the system. 2.An operator's manual which will include detailed instructions for all operations of the system. 3.An operator's reference table listing the addresses of all connected input points and output points. Settings shall beshown where applicable. 4.A programmer's manual which will include all information necessary to perform programming functions. 5.A language manual which will include a detailed description of the language used and all routines used by the system. 6.Flow charts of the overall system configuration. 7.Complete program listing file and parameter listing file for all programs. 8.A copy of the warranty. 9.Operating and maintenance cautions and instructions. 10.Recommended spare parts list. E.As-built drawings and sequence of operation to be provided on back of door at each control panel for field reference. F.Upon completion of project, DDC Contractor shall adjust and validate all thermostats, controllers, valves, damper operators, relays, instruments and devices provided under this section in conjunction and coordinated with Section 23 0593 -Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC. 3.04TRAINING A.Contractor shall provide to the Design Professionala training class outline prior to any scheduled training. B.Training sessions shall be provided for the Owner's personnel by factory trained control engineers and technicians. Refer to Section 23 0010 -HVACGeneral Provisions for minimum times. C.The course shall include instruction on specific systems and instructions for operating the installed system to include as a minimum: 1.HVAC System overview. 2.Operation of Control System. 3.Function of each Component. 4.System Operating Procedures. 5.Programming Procedures. 6.Maintenance Procedures. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-15 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3.05WARRANTY A.Warranty: The control system shall be warranted to be free from defects in both material and workmanship for a period of one (1) year of normal use and service, with the exception of control valves with a five (5) year warranty. This warranty shall become effective the date the owner accepts the system. 3.06SPARES A.Provide one each of the following spare parts: 1.Room Sensor 2.Velocity Sensor 3.Zone Controller Board (one of each type) 4.Local Controller Board (one of each type) END OF SECTION 23 0900 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 0900-16 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 2123-HYDRONICPUMPS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Extent of HVAC pumps work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B.Types of pumps specified in this section include the following: 1.End Suction Base Mounted Pumps C.Refer to Division-26 sections for the following work; not work of this section: 1.Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on pumps. Include starters, disconnects and required electrical devices, except where specifiedas furnished, or factory installed, by manufacturer. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.UL Compliance: Design, manufacturer and install HVAC pumps in accordance with UL 778 "Motor Operated Water Pumps". B.UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electric motors and components which are listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories and comply with NEMA standards. 1.04SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's pump specifications, installation and start-up instructions, and current accurate pump characteristic performance curves with selection points clearly indicated. B.Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and method of assembly of components. C.Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to HVAC pumps. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be field installed. 1.05PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Handle HVAC pumps and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged HVAC pumps or components; replace with new. B.Store HVAC pumps and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.Pumps 1.Aurora 2.Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div. 3.Taco, Inc. 4.Armstrong 5.Grundfos / Paco 6.Patterson Pump B.General: Provide factory tested pumps, thoroughly cleaned and painted with one coat of machinery enamel prior to shipment. Type, size and capacity of each pump is listed in pump schedule. Provide pumps of same type by same manufacturer. 2.02BASE MOUNTED END SUCTION PUMPS A.General: Install Base Mounted End-Suction Pumps where indicated, and of capacities as scheduled. B.Type: Base mounted, single stage, end suction design with a foot mounted volute to allow servicing of the impeller and bearing assembly without disturbing piping connections. Pumps shall be designed for 175 psi working pressure, and 225deg. F continuous water temperature. C.Construction: Class 30 cast iron body with integrally-cast pedestal support feet, suction and discharge flanges, gauge (suction and discharge), vent and drain ports. Solid steel shaft with bronze shaft-sleeve, mounted on heavy-duty grease lubricated ball bearings. Internally flushed, carbon, mechanical seals. The pump internals shall be capable of being servicedwithout disturbing piping connections. Provide with wear rings. D.Impeller: Cast bronze, hydraulically and dynamically balanced, keyed to the shaft and secured by a locking stainless steel cap screw or nut. E.Coupling: A flexible type, center drop-out design coupling shall be employed between the pump and motor. Pumps for variable speed application shall have suitable coupling design for application. Coupling shield shall be OSHA complaint and include an inspection window. F.Motor: Motors shall have heavy-duty grease lubricated ball bearings. Motors shall be non- overloading at any point on the pump curve Motor shall meet NEMA specifications and shall be of the size, voltage and enclosure called for on the plans. Pump and motor shall be factory aligned, and shall be realigned by Contractor after installation. G.Base: Structural steel or fabricated steel channel with fully enclosed sides and ends, and securely welded cross members. Grouting area shall be fully opened. H.Each pump shall be factory tested per Hydraulic Institute standards. It shall then be thoroughly cleaned and painted with at least one coat of high grade machinery enamel prior to shipment. I.Suction Diffuser: Provide at each base mounted pump a Suction Diffuser of size and type noted on drawings. Units shall consist of angle type cast iron body with steel straightening vanes and steel combination Diffuser Strainer-Orifice Cylinder with 3/16" diameter openings for pump protection. A permanent magnet shall be located within the flow stream and shall be removable for cleaning. The orifice cylinder shall be equipped with a disposable fine mesh bronze strainer which shall be removed after system start-up. Orifice cylinder shall be designed to withstand pressure differential equal to pump shutoff head and shall have a free areaequal to five times HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 cross section area of pump suction opening. Straightening vanes shall extend the full length of the orifice cylinder and shall be replaceable. Unit shall be provided with adjustable support foot to carry weight of suction piping. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSPECTION A.Examine areas and conditions under which HVAC pumps are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable with Installer. 3.02INSTALLATION OF PUMPS A.General: Install HVACpumps where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's published installation instructions, complying with recognized industry practices to ensure that HVAC pumps comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. B.Access: Provide access space around HVAC pumps for service as indicated, but in no case less than that recommended by manufacturer. C.Support: 1.Support: Grout base mounted pumps to housekeeping pads with non-shrinking grout in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. Level pumpsas required prior to grouting. D.Controls: Install devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer for power wiring. 1.Verify that wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. E.Piping Connections: Refer to Division-23HVACpiping sections. Provide piping, valves, accessories, gauges and supports as indicated, including the following: 1.Flexible connector in suction and discharge line of base mounted pumps. 2.Shut-off valve in suction line. 3.Check valve, balancing/shut-off valve in discharge line. For pipe sizes 2” and larger, check valve to be spring loaded silent type.At Contractor's option, an indicating type butterfly valve may be used in lieu of balancing cock and shut-off valve. 4.Compound gauge with turn cocks connected between pump suction and discharge. 3.03ALIGNMENT AND START-UP A.Alignment: Check alignment, and where necessary, realign shafts of motors and pumps within recommended tolerances by manufacturer, and in presence of manufacturer's service representative. B.Start-up: Lubricate pumps before start-up. Start-up in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint. END OF SECTION 23 2123 HYDRONIC PUMPS 23 2123-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 232300-REFRIGERANTPIPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 230010 -HVACGeneral Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, tools, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install complete piping system as required by the drawings and this section. 1.Extent of refrigerantpiping work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. a.Refrigerant suction line piping between compressors and cooling coils. b.Refrigerant liquid line piping between liquid receivers and cooling coils. 2.Insulation of refrigerantpiping is specified in other Division-23sections, and is included as work of this section. 3.Installation of valves for refrigerantpiping system is specified in other Division-23 sections and is included as work of this section. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.ANSI Code Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping", and extend applicable lower pressure limits to pressures below 15 psig. B.Safety Code Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration". C.UMC Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigeration piping in accordance with IAMPO "Uniform Mechanical Code". D.IMC Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigeration piping in accordance with "International Mechanical Code". PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A.General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressure ratings, temperature ratings and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements. Provide materials and products complying with ANSIB31.5"Code for RefrigerationPiping" where applicable, base pressure rating on refrigerationpiping system's maximum design pressures. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; provide fittings of materials which match pipe materials used in refrigerationpiping systems. Where more than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option. B.Valves: Refer to Section 230523 -General Duty Valves for HVACPiping. C.Piping Specialties: Refer to Section -230500 -Common Work Results for HVAC. REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 2300-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 D.Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 230529 -Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping. 2.02PIPE: MaterialService A.Copper refrigeration tube, hardRefrigerant lines. temper. Type L-ACR. ASTM B88. 2.03FITTINGS: A.Copper refrigerant tubes: 1.3/4” and Smaller: Cast copper-alloy for flared copper tubes. 2.7/8” through 4 1/8’: Wrought-copper, solder joints. 2.04JOINTS A.Copper refrigeranttube: 1.3/4” and Smaller: Flared. 2.7/8” through 4 1/8’: Soldered, silver-lead solder, ANSI/ASTM B 32, Grade 96 TS. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSPECTION A.General: Examine areas and conditions under whichrefrigerantpiping systems materials and products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02INSTALLATION OF BASIC MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A.General: Install basic materials and products as required per manufacturers recommendations, = ANSIB31.5Code for Refrigerant Piping”and as required to meet the intent of the documents. A B.Refrigerant Piping 1.Install pipe for all refrigerantsystems as indicated on drawings, as called for in other sections, and as specified herein. 2.Arrange and install piping approximately as indicated; straight, plumb, and as direct as possible; form right angles on parallel lines with building walls. Keep pipes close to walls and avoid interference with other refrigerantitems. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other; space at a distance to permit applying full insulation and to permit access for servicing valves. Most piping to be run in concealed locations unless indicated exposed, or in equipment rooms. Locate piping to avoid ductwork. 3.Install horizontal piping as high as possible without sags or humps so that proper grades can be maintained for drainage.Pitch piping in direction of oil return to compressor. 4.Check all piping for interference with othertrades, avoid placing water pipes over electrical equipment. 5.Where rough-in is required for equipment furnished by others, verify exact rough-in dimension with owner or equipment supplier before roughing-in. REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 2300-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 6.Where refrigeration piping is buried, encase piping and insulation loosely in schedule 40 PVC and ventilate PVC pipe to allow vapor line to see outside air temperature. Ensure PVC pipe is free draining to prevent water buildup. Provide a riser trap and slope refrigeration line to trap. Where buried lengths exceed 25', provide a 90 minute timer wired parallel with thermostat control to operate unit every 90 minutes to maintain safe slugging levels. C.Valves 1.Refer to Section 23 0523 -General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping. 2.Locate valves for easy access and operation. Do not locate valves with stems below horizontal. D.Piping Specialties: Refer to Section 230500 -Common Work Results for HVAC. E.Supports, Anchors and Seals: Refer to Section 230529 -Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping. F.Install specialties and accessories as indicated on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and applicable codes and standards. G.Equipment Connections 1.General: Connect refrigerantpiping system to refrigerantequipment as indicated, and comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. H.Field Quality Control 1.Refrigerant Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, test refrigerant piping with electronic leak detector. System must be entirely leak-free. 2.Repair or replace refrigerant piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest as specified to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION 232300 REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 2300-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 3113-METAL DUCTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Provide material, equipment, labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and erect low pressure ductwork as required by the drawings and this section. B.Low pressure ductwork shall apply to the following: 1.Supply: Downstream of terminal units, less than 1" static pressure. 2.Return: Upstream of terminal units, less than 1" static pressure. C.High velocity ductwork shall apply to the following: 1.Supply & Ventilation: Upstream of terminal units, less than 6" static pressure. 2.Return:Downstream of terminal units, less than 6" static pressure. 1.03DEFINITIONS A.Conditioned Space: An area inside the building which is heated and/or cooled. B.Tempered Space: an area inside the building which is not directly heated or cooled, but is adjacent to a heated or cooled space with no insulation separating the two spaces (e.g., ceiling plenums). C.Untempered Space: an area inside the building which is not conditioned and is not tempered (e.g., attic spaces). D.Exterior: An area outside the building (e.g., roof mounted items). 1.04QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Duct and plenum construction, metal gauges, reinforcing, methods of supporting and hanging and other sheet metal work as called for shall be in accordance with the following standards: 1."SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards", Second Edition 1995, by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA). B.Low pressure ductwork shall conform to the following SMACNA pressure classifications. Refer to plans for ductwork designations. Supply & Relief -Rectangular..........................1" positive Supply & Relief –Round..................................2" positive Return & Outdoor -Rectangular.......................1" negative Return & Outdoor -Round................................2" negative METAL DUCTS 23 3113-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.High velocity ductwork shall conform to the following SMACNA pressure classifications. Supply & Ventilation -Rectangular....................4" positive Supply & Ventilation -Round.............................4" positive Return -Rectangular.........................................4" negative Return -Round..................................................4" negative D.NFPA Compliance: All liner and covering materials shall have maximum UL Flame Spread Index of 25, and maximum Smoke Developed Index of 50, and shall meet all requirements of NFPA-90A. 1.05SUBMITTALS A.Shop Drawings: 1.Submit 1/4 scale shop fabrication shop drawings. 2.Submit shop drawings of elbows and fittings showing static pressure loss charted for air quantities involved in each. B.Two copies of duct leak testing results. C.Submit weld sample, welding information, and welders’certification for weld stainless steel ductwork. Submittal to include the following information: 1.Welder name(s): 2.Certification: 3.Metal type and gauge: 4.Joint preparation: 5.Welding process: 6.Equipment utilized: 7.Filler specifications: 8.Shield gas: D.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showingmanufacturer's product number, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation. E.Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each type of mechanical insulation. Include this data in maintenance manual. F.Certifications: Submit certifications or other data as necessary to show compliance with these specifications and governing regulations. Include proof of compliance for test of products for fire rating, corrosiveness, and compressive strength. G.Submit product data for kitchen exhaust ductwork. 1.06REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A.National Fire Protection Association, NFPA 90A: Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. B.Underwriter's Laboratories, UL 181: Factory-Made Duct Materials and Air DuctConnections. 1.07DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A.Protect shop-fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. 1.Stored materials subject to rejection due to damage. METAL DUCTS 23 3113-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B.Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard ratings of products. C.Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install damaged insulation; remove from project site. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.All sheet metal work shall be constructed of prime quality resquared tight coat galvanized steel, except where other type material is specified. Manufacturer's name and U.S. gauge number shall appear on each sheet. B.Duct Lining Materials 1.Certain-Teed 2.Owens Corning Fiberglass 3.Johns-Manville 4.PPG 5.Knauf 2.02GALVANIZED STEEL DUCTWORK–LOW VELOCITY A.General: Provide factory-fabricated or shop fabricated duct and fittings. B.Materials: Galvanized sheet steel complying with ANSI/ASTM A527, lockforming quality, with ANSI/ASTM A525, G90 zinc coatings, mill phosphatized. C.Gauge: Comply with code requirements for minimum gauge thickness for various sizes. D.Fittings: 1.Construct branches, bends, and elbows with centerline radius of not less than duct 1.0 times the width (diameter), where space conditions will not permit this radius or where indicated on drawings, square elbows with air turns shall be used. 2.Slopes for transitions or other changes in dimension shall be minimum 1:3. 3.Longitudinal seams shall be Pittsburgh Lock or snaplock equal per SMACNA. Lateral seams shall be slip drive or standing. Slip seams and sheet metal screws not permitted. 2.03GALVANIZED STEEL DUCTWORK –HIGH VELOCITY A.Single-Wall Ducts: Spiral-wound, zinc-coated steel with individual formed steel tees and elbows. 1.Single-Wall Round Duct Gauges: Minimum USS Gauge Spiral Lock Seam Duct Diameter (Inches) Up to 826 9 to 2224 23 to 3622 37 to 5020 51 to 6018 61 and Over16 METAL DUCTS 23 3113-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2.Single-Wall Oval Duct Gauges, Factory-Made with Spiral Lock Seams: Maximum WidthMinimum in Inches USS GaugeReinforcement Longitudinal Centers Up to 1024None 11 to 20224 foot centers 21 to 40182 x 2 x 1/8 angle 2.5 foot centers 41 to 72162 x2 x 3/16 angle 2 foot centers B.Flexible Ductwork, Insulated: Suitable for -20F to 220F temperature range and minimum 12 inches w.c. working pressure. 1.Acceptable Manufacturers: a.Flexmaster:Type 3 b.Genflex:IHPL (1-1/2" thick insulation) c.Thermaflex:M-KC (1-1/2" thick insulation) 2.Inner Liner: Glass fiber, PVC coating, factory-clinched in cold-rolled galvanized steel spiral, or with spiral wire permanently bonded to fabric, UL listed, complying with NFPA 90. 3.Outer Jacket: 1-1/2" thick, 3/4 lb. fibrousglass, with flame-resistant PVC vapor barrier. C.Access Panels: Shall be of same material as ducts in which they are installed, fabricated of two thicknesses of not less than 24gauge, with 1" thick rigid glass fiber filler. Provide sheet metal frame, airtight gasket equal to United McGill AOBXFDDC. D.Fabrication 1.Directional Change: a.Construct tees, bends, and elbows with radius minimum 1.0timeswidth of duct on center line. 2.Size Change: a.Increase and decrease duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15, unless otherwise noted on Drawings. 3.Seams and Joints: In accordance with SMACNA standards. a.Rigidly construct metal ducts with joints mechanically tight, substantially airtight, braced and stiffened so not to breathe, rattle, vibrate or sag. b.Where spiral ductwork is exposed, assemble duct to duct joints with spiral seam following continuous helicoid pattern across joints. 2.04DUCT SEALING–LOW VELOCITY A.All joints in low pressure duct work shall be sealed with Foster 32-14 or DuctMate ProSeal.Apply and install joint sealer per manufacturer’s recommendations. In general, apply to male end of coupling and/or interior of female fitting. After connection, brush sealant over the assembled joint and screws with a 2” to 3” wide band. Sealant shall be allowed to set for 48 hours before any air pressure is put on system. All tie bars, bolts and rivets shall be sealed with the specified sealant. Sealant as manufactured by Minnesota Mining No. 800 or United Sheet Metal will be considered equal. METAL DUCTS 23 3113-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B.Alternate Sealing System: 1.Transverse duct joints may be made with the Ductmate System or an approved equal. 2.The installation of the Ductmate System shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instruction and installation manuals. 3.The standard Ductmate System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "J" connection. The Ductmate-JR System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "E" connection. Construction of the duct, such as gauge, reinforcing, etc. shall be as indicated in the addendum to the SMACNA manuals as provided by the manufacturer and as tested by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory. C.Duct Sealing Requirements: SMACNA Seal Class C. 2.05DUCT SEALING-HIGH VELOCITY A.All joints in low pressure duct work shall be sealed with Foster 32-14 or Ductmate ProSeal. Apply and install joint sealer per manufacturer’s recommendations. In general, apply to male end of coupling and/or interior of female fitting. After connection, brush sealant over the assembled joint and screws with a 2” to 3” wide band. Sealant shall be allowed to set for 48 hours before any air pressure is put on system. All tie bars, bolts and rivets shall be sealed with the specified sealant. Sealant as manufactured by Minnesota Mining No. 800 or United Sheet Metal will be considered equal. B.Alternate Sealing System: 1.Transverse duct joints may be made with the Ductmate System or an approved equal. 2.The installation of the Ductmate System shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s printed instruction and installation manuals. 3.The standard DuctmateSystem joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "J" connection. The Ductmate-JR System joint is the equivalent of a SMACNA "E" connection. Construction of the duct, such as gauge, reinforcing, etc. shall be as indicated in the addendum to the SMACNA manuals as provided by the manufacturer and as tested by Pittsburgh Testing Laboratory. C.Duct Sealing Requirements: SMACNA Seal Class A. 2.06DUCT LINER A.Lining materials shall be Type 'A' Duct Liner,Certain-Teed Coated Ultralite 150, one and one half (1 1/2) pounds per cubic foot density. B.Unless noted otherwise, all ductwork and accessories shall be either lined or coveredas scheduled on plans. If type or thickness is not indicated, it shall be 1-1/2” covering. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION A.Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve airtight and quiet systems, capable of performing each indicated service. 1.Install each run with minimum joints. METAL DUCTS 23 3113-5 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2.Align ductwork accurately at connections and with internal surfaces smooth. 3.Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and prevent buckling and vibration. B.Ducts shall be installed following essentially lines indicated on drawings, install offsets, angles and transitions as may be required to avoid interferences with other work. Maintain full capacity of ducts at offsets, angles and transitions except where drawings indicate use of reducing or increasing transitions. 1.General: Each duct section shall be rigidly supported from structure. Attach hangers to structure with expansion plugs, concrete inserts, beam clamps or other approved means. Rubber in-shear isolators shall be installed in hangers for all ducts in equipment rooms, to prevent vibration transmission to the structure. C.Install hangers and supports in accordance with SMACNA Standards general locations: 1.Install hangers close to transverse joints of main ducts and branches, clinch collar branch connections and the first branch elbows after nested splits. 2.Locate hangers of duct penetrating walls or partitions as though the walls will contribute no support to the duct. 3.Install hangers in pairs on exact opposite sides of duct. 4.Maintain hanger spacing intervals less than, equal to, but not greater than the specified maximums. 5.Install hangers at the midpoint of small and medium size horizontal vaned square elbows. On wide vaned square elbows, install additional hangers at maximum allowable intervals or less measured along the heel lines of the elbows. 6.Provide a set of hangers at the midpoint of small and medium size horizontal radius elbows. Install one or more supplementary hangers, as necessary, along the inside and outside arcs of large radius elbows of any angle whenever the lengths of these arcs exceed the maximum hanger spacing length for that particular size duct. 7.Provide at least one set of hangers for short duct branches 3 feet or less in length. 8.Provide each duct riser with a minimum of two supports completely spanning the shaft opening at each floor. One pair of supports may be used to support more than one duct riser, provided that the strength of the supports is increased appropriately and proper additional supplementary steel is used at the extra risers. 9.Support duct risers, located between floors that are more than 15 feet high, at each floor and halfway points between floors. The distance between intermediate supports on very high floors should not exceed 12 feet. Intermediate hangers may be supported from an adjacent wall or hungby rods from supports on the floor above. 10.Provide one or more sets of hangers for equipment in duct runs such as heating coils, heat pumps, etc., as recommended by their manufacturers. D.Locate duct hangers approximately: 1.2 to 24 inches from flexible connections of fans. 2.2 to 24 inches from the outlets or flexible connects of VAV control units or mixing boxes. METAL DUCTS 23 3113-6 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3.12 to 36 inches from the main duct to the first hanger of long branch ducts. 4.2 to 12 inches from the ends of all branch ducts and linear diffuser plenums. 5.2 to 24 inches from fire damper breakaway joints. 6.0 inches to half the duct width plus 2 inches from the vertical centerline of the lower elbow of short vertical offsets made with vaned square elbows. The width refers to the dimension of the elbow in the plane of the turn. 7.0 inches to half the duct width plus 2 inches from the vertical centerline of the bottom and top elbows of vaned square elbow offsets over 8 feet high. 8.One-eighth of the arc in from the ends of bottom and top radius elbowsof vertical offsets longer than 8 feet. Short vertical offsets require hangers at the bottom elbow. Likewise, sloping offsets need at least one set of hangers at their lower radius elbow. 9.6 to 12 inches from transverse joints of ducts whose lengths arethe same as specified hanger intervals. 10.6 to 12 inches from one side of walls or partitions penetrated by ducts. E.Maximum permitted hanger spacing: 1.Ducts with areas up to 4 square feet may have their hangers spaced up to 8 feet apart. 2.Ducts with areas 4.1 to 10 square feet may have their hangers spaced not more than 6 feet apart. 3.Ducts with areas over 10 square feet may have their hangers located up to 4 feet apart. F.Provide and install locking manual volume dampers in all duct systems as required for controlling air volumes to trunk ducts, branch ducts, outlets and inlets. Provide and install additional volume dampers as required by Testing and Balancing Contractor for balancing of system. G.Duct sizes shown on drawings are net inside dimensions and sheet metal size shall be increased to allow for duct linings. H.Install as indicated on the drawings all duct mounted equipment as specified in other sections. I.Install eccentric reducers with tops of both duct sizes flush to maintain maximum ceiling space below ducts. J.Openings: 1.Provide in ductwork to accommodate access doors, temperature control components and fire dampers. 2.Install access panels for inspection and servicing of all duct mounted equipment: reheat coils, sound attenuators, motorized dampers, smoke and fire dampers. 3.Provide pitot tube openings for testing of systems, complete with metal cap, with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. 4.Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation materials inside metalcollar. METAL DUCTS 23 3113-7 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 K.Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. L.Connections: 1.Connect duct to equipment with flexible fabric, sheet metal clips, screws and washers. 2.At each point where ducts pass through partitions, provide sleeve with space between duct and sleeve packed with insulation and sealed. M.Where ducts pass through fire-rated walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings, seal openings in accordance with Specification Section 23 0500 -Common Work Results for HVAC. 3.02DUCT LINER APPLICATION A.Apply duct liner with coated or surface designed to be exposed facing the air stream and adhered with 100% coverage of fire retardant adhesive. When width exceeds 12" or height exceeds 24", additionally secure liner with mechanical fasteners spaced 12" maximum centers. Fasteners shall start within 3" of leading edge of traverse joints. Coat all exposed joints and edges of traverse joints with a fire retardant adhesive. B.Duct sizes shown on drawings are net inside dimensions and sheet metal size shall be increased to allow for duct lining. 3.03ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A.Cleaning: 1.Clean ductwork internally, as it is installed, of dust and debris. 2.Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or where ductwork is to be painted. B.Temporary Closure: 1.At ends of ducts which are not connected to equipment or air distribution devices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film or other covering until time connections are to be completed. 3.04DUCT LEAK TESTING –HIGH VELOCITY A.Tappable and Fume Hood Exhaust Ducts: 1.Testing shall be done before any exterior insulation is applied. 2.Fume hood and tappable exhaust ducts are intended to be virtually without leakage within the building. 3.Each exhaust system shall be capped at all inlet points and at the point of discharge to atmosphere. Fans, dampers and flexible connections shall be included in the testing. 4.Each duct system shall be pressurized to 7inch water column and shall exhibit a leakage rate of less than 4 cfm regardless of system size or design flow rate. 5.Where several ducts discharge into a large collection duct, the collection duct and each individual exhaust duct may be treated as separate duct systems. METAL DUCTS 23 3113-8 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B.HVAC Supply and Exhaust Ducts: 1.The system shall be leak tested at the design operating pressure with a total leakage not to exceed 2% of the total design cfm for the system. 2.Carefully seal off all openings (except one for connecting thetest equipment) to the riser or run-out section to be tested. 3.Follow the recommendations of the manufacturer of the duct seal to allow for adequate cure time for sealer. 4.Connect test blower, calibrated orifice tube and manometers to the system in accordance with the test equipment manufacturer's recommendations. 5.When the specified test pressure is reached, allow the blower to run for one minute to make sure that the pressure is stabilized. 6.When the pressure is holding steady, measure the air flowing through the orifice tube assembly. 3.05DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE–LOW VELOCITY AIR SYSTEMMATERIAL HVAC Supply, ReturnSteel, Galvanized General Exhaust 3.06DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE –HIGH VELOCITY MATERIAL AIR SYSTEM HVAC Supply,Return andSteel, Galvanized General Exhaust END OF SECTION 23 3113 METAL DUCTS 23 3113-9 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 3300-AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this Section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Extent of duct accessories is indicated on drawings and by the requirements of this section. B.Types of duct accessories required for project include the following: 1.Sound Attenuators 2.Volume Dampers/Regulators 3.Flexible Ducts 4.Access Doors 5.Control Dampers 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA) "Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide". B.Industry Standards: Comply with American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) recommendations pertaining to construction of duct accessories, except as otherwise indicated. C.UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers inaccordance with Underwriters Laboratories (UL) Standard 555 "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers". D.NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI/NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of duct accessories. 1.04SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for each type of duct accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions. B.Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop drawings for each type of duct accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, and method of fastening or support. C.Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each type of duct accessory; include this data in Maintenance Manual. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible ductwork equal to one of the following: 1.Semco 2.Wiremold AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3300-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3.Thermaflex 4.Valuflex B.Sound Attenuators 1.Price 2.Industrial Acoustics Company 3.Ruskin Manufacturing 4.Semco 5.Vibro Acoustics 6.Commercial Acoustics 2.02SOUND ATTENUATORS A.General: Furnish and install sound attenuators of the types and sizes listed in schedule. B.Materials and Construction 1.Outer casings of silencers shall be made of galvanized steel in accordancewith ASHRAE GUIDE recommended construction for high pressure rectangular duct work. Seams shall be lock formed and mastic filled. a.Rectangular:22 gauge (min.) b.Elbows:18 gauge (min.) c.Circular: Connection DiameterCasing Gauge Less than 18"22 18" to 30"20 30" to 54"18 Over 54"16 2.Interior partitions for silencers shall be made of perforated galvanized steel. a.Rectangular:22 gauge b.Elbows:22 gauge c.Circular:22 gauge 3.Filler material shall be of inorganic mineral or glass fiber of a density sufficient to obtain the specified acoustic performance and be packed under not less than 5% compression to eliminate voids due to vibration and settling. Material shall be inert, vermin and moisture proof. 4.Combustion rating for the silencer acoustic fill shall not exceedthe following when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, NFPA Standard 255 or UL No. 723: Flamespread Classification25 Smoke Development Rating50 Fuel Contribution20 5.Airtight construction shall be provided by use of a duct sealing compound on the job site. Material and labor furnished by Contractor. Silencers shall not fail structurally when subjected to a differential air pressure of 8 i.w.g. inside to outside of casing. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3300-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.Acoustic Performance 1.Silencer ratings shall bedetermined in a duct-to-reverberant room test facility which provides for airflow in both directions through the test silencer in accordance with ASTM Specification E 477-06. The test set-up and procedure shall be such that all effects due to end reflection, directivity, flanking transmission, standing waves and test chamber sound absorption are eliminated. Acoustic ratings shall include Dynamic Insertion Loss (DIL) and Self-Noise (SN) Power Levels both for FORWARD FLOW (air and noise in same direction) and REVERSE FLOW (air and noise in opposite directions) with airflow of at least 2000 fpm entering face velocity. Data for rectangular and tubular type silencers shall be presented for tests conducted using silencers no smaller than the following cross-sections: Rectangular, in. -24 x 24, 24 x 30, or 24 x 36 D.Aerodynamic Performance 1.Static pressure loss of silencers shall not exceed those listed in the silencer schedule as the airflow indicates. Airflow measurements shall be made in accordance with ASTM Specification E 477-06 and applicable portions of ASME, AMCA, and ADC airflow test codes. Tests shall be reported on the identical units for which acoustic data is presented. E.Certification 1.With submittals, the manufacturer shall supply certified test data on Dynamic Insertion Loss, Self-Noise Power Levels, and Aerodynamic Performance for Reverse and Forward Flow test conditions. Test data shall be for a standard product. All rating tests shall be conducted in the same facility, shall utilize the samesilencer, and shall be open to inspection upon request from Design Professional. F.Duct Transitions 1.When transitions are required to adapt silencer dimensions to connecting duct work, they shall be furnished by Installing Contractor. G.Access Doors: As indicated on schedule, provide access doors in sound attenuator casing. Access doors shall allow service for inspection and cleaning. Access doors shall be supplied integral to unit and shall have leakage and pressure ratings equal to that of the attenuator. 2.03MISCELLANEOUS A.Manual Volume Dampers: Fabricated of same material as ducts, two metal gauges heavier than duct and hammered 1" all around, mounted on 3/8" square rod with saw slot position indicator. 1.Provide end bearings with gasket -Young Regulator Co. Model 666-FD or equal by Elgin. B.Manual Volume Damper Regulators: 1.Accessible areas: Provide locking position regulator with gasket and handle -Young Regulator Co. Model 403-FD or equal by Elgin. 2.Inaccessible areas: Provide concealed manual volume damper regulators with cover plate and gear assembly-Young Regulator Co. Model 315or equal by Elgin. C.Air Turns: Elgin "Air-Tite" or equal shop fabricated. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3300-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 D.Flexible Duct Connection: 30 ounce woven glass fiber, double neoprene coated, fire retardant, waterproof and air tight, suitable for temperatures to 250 deg. F, UL approved. Ventfabric, Inc. "Ventglass". E.Access Panels: Shall be of same material as ducts in which they are installed, fabricated of two thicknesses of not less than 24gauge, with 1" thick rigid glass fiber filler. Provide sheet metal frame, air tight gasket and two Young Regulator Company No. 1330 latches, or equal by Elgin. 2.04FLEXIBLE DUCT A.Flexible duct shall be factory pre-insulated, consisting of vinyl coated spring steel wire helix bonded to vinyl coated fiberglass mesh screen, having one (1) inch nominal fiberglass insulation and vinyl impregnated closely woven fiberglass vapor barrier. Basis of Design: Semco, Type A1. B.Composite assembly shall meet Class I requirements of NFPA-90A and shall be UL listed for flame spread rating of not more than 25 and smoke developed rating of not more than 50. Assembly shall meet the requirements of UL-181. C.Where flexible duct is allowed, it shall be connected to metal ducts, terminal units and diffusers with Panduit, Tylon or equal tool installed nylon clamps. D.Maximum length of flexible duct connections from metal duct to terminal units and grilles, registers and diffusers shall be not greater than 72". All duct turns greater than 45deg.shall be rigid elbows. E.Wherever ductwork is routed exposed, flexible ductwork is not acceptable. All exposed ductwork to be rigid. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSPECTION A.Examine areas and conditions under which duct accessories will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02INSTALLATION A.Install duct accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function. B.Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from either side, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter. C.Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of duct accessories properly with other work. D.Field Quality Control: Operate installed duct accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance. END OF SECTION 23 3300 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3300-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 7400-PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 23 0010 -HVAC General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Extent of packaged outdoor HVAC equipmentwork required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B.Types of rooftop heating and cooling units specified in thissection include the following: 1.Packaged rooftop units. C.Refer to Division-26 sections for the following work; not work of this section. 1.Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on packaged outdoor HVAC equipment. Include required electrical devices except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed by manufacturer. D.Refer to other Division-23sections for ductwork required external to rooftop heating cooling units for installation; not work of this section. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Regulatory Requirements: 1.ARI Compliance: Provide capacity ratings for packagedoutdoor HVAC equipmentin accordance with ARI standard 360 "Standard for Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment". 2.ASHRAE Compliance: Construct refrigerating system of packaged outdoor HVAC equipment in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 3.ASHRAE Compliance: Provide Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) of packaged outdoor HVAC equipment not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90A "Energy Conservation in New Building Design". 4.UL Compliance: Provide packaged outdoor HVAC equipmentwhich are listed by UL and have UL label affixed. 5.AGA Compliance: Construct gas-fired furnace sections in accordance with AGA safety standards, andprovide AGA label. B.Warranty: 1.Provide one year warranty on all parts except compressor. 2.Provide five year warranty on compressor. PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 7400-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.04SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's equipment specifications, equipment capacities, ratings and selection points, fan curves with selection points clearly indicatedand installation and start-up instructions. B.Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and method of assembly of components. C.Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring to packaged heating and cooling equipment including control and thermostat wiring. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be field installed. 1.05PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Handle packaged outdoor HVAC equipment and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking,denting, and scoring. Do not install damaged packaged outdoor HVAC equipmentor components; replace with new. B.Store packaged outdoor HVAC equipmentand components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage. C.Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading packaged outdoor HVAC equipmentand moving them to final location. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.Packaged Rooftop Units 1.McQuay Group, McQuay-Perfex, Inc. 2.Trane Co., The 2.02ROOFTOP UNITS, 20 TONS AND LARGER A.General: Provide factory-assembled and tested rooftop units as indicated, designed for roof or slab mounting, consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans, refrigeration, heating coils and temperature controls, filters and dampers. Provide capacities and electrical characteristics as scheduled. B.Casing: Provide manufacturer's standard casing construction, corrosion protection coating, and exterior finish. Provide removable panels and/or access doors for inspection and access to internal parts. Insulate casing with 1" thick minimum thermal insulation. Provide knockouts for electrical and piping connections. Provide condensate drain connection and lifting lugs. C.Evaporator Fans: Provide forward-curved, centrifugal, belt driven fans with adjustable sheaves; and permanently lubricated motor bearings. D.Condenser Fans: Provide propeller-type, direct-driven fans with permanently lubricated bearings. E.Coils: For evaporator and condenser, provide non-ferrous construction with aluminum plate fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes; with brazed tubing joints. PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 7400-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 F.Compressors: Provide scroll compressors. Provide vibration isolators and crankcase heaters which de-energize during compressor operation. 1.Provide with minimum steps of unloading as scheduled. 2.Provide thermal expansion valves, filter dryers, sight glasses, compressor service valves, liquid line service valves; and provide minimum of 2 refrigerant circuits for units having 2 or more compressors. G.Safety Controls: Provide the following controls: 1.Low pressure cutout, manual reset. 2.High pressure cutout, manual reset. 3.Compressor motor overload protection, manual reset. 4.Anti-recycling timing device. 5.Adjustable low-ambient lockout. H.Economizer Control: Provide economizer control consisting of return and outside air dampers, outside air filter,power exhaustdamper,fully modulating electric control system with dry bulb control to automatically use outdoor air for free cooling when outdoor air temperature is below 55 (adjustable). I.Filters: Provide filter section consisting of 2" thick fiberglass throwaway filters in filter rack, with maximum face velocity of 300 fpm. J.Electrical: Provide 115V convenience outlet, separately fused, for unit service. Provide means for unit power connection either through unit cabinet or within roof curb perimeter. K.Temperature Control: Provide factory-wired controls and terminal block for power wiring. Unit shall be capable of interfacing with building DDC control system. L.Accessories: Provide the following accessories as indicated and/or scheduled: 1.Stand: Asteel support stand shall be furnished and installed for setting of unit on roof. Refer to structural plansfor details. Contractor shall coordinate requirements with General Contractor. 2.Anti-Recycling Control: Provide control to automatically prevent compressor restart for 5 minutes after shutdown. 3.Provide with power return/exhaust fanand motorized bypassand relief dampers. 4.Provide 2” spring isolators for supply and return fans. 5.Refer to schedule on plans for other options to be provided. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSPECTION A.Examine areas and conditions under which rooftop heating and cooling units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 7400-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3.02INSTALLATION OF ROOFTOP HEATING AND COOLING UNITS A.General: Install rooftop heating and cooling units in accordance with manufacturers installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. B.Support: Install units on steelsupportstand. C.Controls: Install devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Contractor for power wiring only. 1.Verify that wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division-26 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. D.Ductwork: Refer to Division 23, Section 23 3113 -Metal Ducts.Connect supply and return ducts to unit with flexible duct connections. Provide transitions to exactly match unit duct connection size. E.Start-up rooftop heating and cooling units in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. 1.Balancing of unit systems is specified in Division 23, Section 23 0593 -Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC; not work of this section. F.Provide traps on condensate drains with a seal depth equal to unit total static pressure plus 1/2". 3.03GROUNDINGS A.Provide positive equipment ground for rooftop heating and cooling unit components. 3.04TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A.Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of rooftop heating and cooling units. 1.Schedule training with Owner, provide at least 7-day notice to Contractor and Owner of training date. 3.05SPARE PARTS A.General: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts for each packaged heating and cooling unit: 1.One set of matched fan belts for each belt driven fan. 2.One set filters for each unit. END OF SECTION 23 7400 PACKAGED OUTDOOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 7400-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 23 8126-SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 - General Requirements are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Extent of packaged cooling units work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section. B.Types of packaged cooling units specified in this section include the following: 1.Split System Air ConditioningUnits. C.Refer to Division-26 sections for the following work: 1.Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on packagedcooling units. Include disconnects and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory-installed by manufacturer. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Regulatory Requirements: 1.UL Compliance: Provide packaged heating and cooling units which are designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with UL requirements. B.Warranty: 1.Provide one year warranty on all parts except compressor and heating elements. 2.Provide five year warranty on compressor and heating elements. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's equipment specifications, equipment capacities, ratings and selection points, and installation and start-up instructions. B.Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings indicating dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances and method of assembly of components. C.Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supplywiring to packaged cooling equipment including control and thermostat wiring. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and portions to be field installed. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A.Handle packagedcooling units and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, denting and scoring. Do not install damaged packaged cooling units or components; replace with new. B.Store packaged heating and cooling units and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water, construction debris and physical damage. SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS 23 8126-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions forunloading packaged cooling units, and moving them to final location. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.Split System Air Conditioning Unit 1.Fujitsu 2.Mitsubishi 3.LG 2.02 SPLITSYSTEM UNITS A.General: Furnish and install a ductless split system AC unitconsisting of an indoor wall mounted evaporator/blower section and matching outdoor condensing section of size, voltage, and capacities shown on unit schedule. Systems shall be ARI 210 or 240 & 270 B.Indoor Evaporator/Blower Section: Indoor section shall be compact cassettes, factory assembled and wired. Units shall be furnished with anti-mold, poly type washable air filters. C.Outdoor Condensing Section: Outdoor section shall be single-zone outdoor unit with R410A refrigerant. Unit shall utilize high performance, low noise, large capacity OC twin rotary compressor and shall be paired with indoor evaporator/blower section as indicated. D. Provide with the following accessories: Refer to schedule. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSPECTION A.Examine areas and conditions under which packaged heating and cooling units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PACKAGEDCOOLING UNITS A.General: Install packagedcooling units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances. B.Controls: Install devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Contractor for power wiring. 1.Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal and installation requirements of Division-16 sections. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer. C.Refrigerant Piping: Refer to Section 23 23 00 -Refrigeration Piping. Connect liquid and suction piping to unit as indicated, charge system, and check for leaks. D.Drain Piping: Route drain line to nearest service sinkor drainas indicated. SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS 23 8126-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 H.Start-up packagedcooling units, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3.03 TRAINING OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL A.Instruct Owner'spersonnel in operation and maintenance of packaged cooling units. END OF SECTION 23 8126 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS 23 8126-3 Division 26 Electrical 26 Division CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 0010-ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Refer to Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements and Division 01 -General Requirements, which all apply to work under this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Work shall include furnishing of all systems, equipment and material specified in this division and as called for on the electrical drawings, to include supervision, operations, methods and labor for the fabrication, installation, start-up and tests for the complete electrical installation. B.All elements of the construction shall be performed by workmen skilled in the particular craft involved, and regularly employed in that particular craft. C.All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner in keeping with the highest standards of the craft. 1.03CODES AND STANDARDS A.All work shall be done in accordance with the applicable portion of the following codes and standards: 1.National Electrical Code 2.National Fire Protection Association 3.National Electrical Manufacturers Association 4.Standards of Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 5.InternationalBuilding Code 6.Occupational Safety and Health Act 7.Iowa Administrative Code 8.NECA Standards 9.Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) B.All Contractors shall familiarize themselves with all codes and standards applicable to their work and shall notify Design Professionalof any discrepancies between the design and applicable code requirements so that any conflicts can be resolved. Where two or more codes or standards are in conflict, that requiring the highest order of workmanship shall take precedence, but such questions shall be referred to Design Professionalfor final decision. 1.04REQUIREMENTS & FEES OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A.Contractor shall comply with the rules and regulations of the local utility companies. He shall check with each utility company providing service to this project and determine or verify their requirements regarding incoming services. B.Meters for incoming services shall be selected based on the project requirements. Any questions concerning this shall be referred to Design Professionalprior to bidding. Contractor shall provide the appropriate meter and associated materials if not furnished by the utility company. C.Secure all required permits and pay forall inspections, licenses and fees required in connection with the electrical workincluding State of Iowa Electrical Inspections. Contractor shall post all bonds and obtain all licenses required by the State, City, County and Utility. D.Contractor shall make all arrangements with each utility company and pay all service charges associated with new service. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.05ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS A.The electrical drawings indicate in general the building arrangement only. Contractor shall examine construction drawings to become familiar with the specific type of building construction, i.e. type of structural system, floors, walls, ceilings, room finishes and elevations. B.Drawings for the electrical work are in part diagrammatic, and are intended to convey the scope of the workand to indicate in general the location of equipment. C.Contractor shall layout his own work and shall be responsible for determining the exact locations for equipment and rough-ins and the exact routing of conduits and raceway so as to best fit the layoutof the work. D.Contractor shall take his own field measurements for verifying locations and dimensions; scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient for laying out the work. E.Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items such as couplings, pull or splice boxes may not be shown, but where such items are required by code or by other sections of the specifications or where they are required for proper installation of the work, such items shall be furnished and installed. 1.06ACTIVE SERVICES A.Contractor shall be responsible for verifying exact locations of all existing services prior to beginning work in that area. B.Existing active services, i.e., water, gas, sewer, electric, when encountered, shall be protected against damage. Do not prevent or disturb operation of active services which are to remain. C.When active services are encountered which require relocation, Contractor shall make request to authorities with jurisdiction for determination of procedures. D.Where existing services are to be abandoned, they shall be terminated in conformance with requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07SITE INSPECTION A.Contractor shall inspect the site prior to submitting bid for work to familiarize himself with the conditions of the site which will affect his work and shall verify points of connection with utilities, routing of outside conduit to include required clearances from any existing structures, trees or other obstacles. B.Extra payment will not be allowed for changes in the work required becauseof Contractor's failure to make this inspection. 1.08COORDINATION AND COOPERATION A.It shall be Contractor's responsibility to schedule and coordinate his work with the schedule of the General Contractor so as to progress the work expeditiously, and to avoid unnecessary delays. B.Contractor shall fully examine the drawings and specifications for other trades and shall coordinate the installation of his work with the work of the other contractors. Contractor shall consult and cooperate with the other contractors for determining space requirements and for determining that adequate clearance is allowed with respect to his equipment, other equipment and the building. The Design Professionalreserves the right to determine space priority of the contractors in the event of interference between piping, conduit, ducts and equipment of the various contractors. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.Conflicts between the drawings and the specifications or between the requirements set forth for the various contractors shall be called to the attention of the Design Professional. If clarification is not asked for prior to the taking of bids, it will be assumed that none is required and that the Contractor is in agreement with the drawings and specifications as issued. If clarification is required after the contract is awarded, such clarification will be made by the Design Professional and his decision will be final. D.Special care shall be taken for protection for all equipment. All equipment and material shall be completely protected from weather elements, painting, plaster, etc., until the project is substantially completed. Damage from rust, paint, scratches, etc., shall be repaired as required to restore equipment to original condition. E.Protection of all equipment during the painting of the building shall be the responsibility of the Painting Contractor, but this shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility for checking to assure that adequate protection is being provided.Refer to Division 09 for painting protection. F.Where the final installation or connection of equipment in the building requires the contractor to work in areas previously finished by the General Contractor, the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible that such areas are protected and are not marred, soiled or otherwise damaged during the course of such work. Electrical Contractor shall arrange with the General Contractor for patching and refinishing of such areas which may be damaged in this respect. 1.09OPENINGS, CUTTING AND PATCHING A.Refer to Division 1 for additional cutting and patching information. B.Conduits and sleevespassing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall/floor and conduit or sleeve shall be sealed with UL listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall/floor. Where conduit or sleeves pass through floors, roofs, walls and partitions that are not fire or smoke rated, penetrations shall be sealed with grout or caulk. C.Existing Structure: 1.Contractor shall provide cutting, lintels and patching, and patch painting in the existing structure, as required for the installation of his work, and shall furnish lintels and supports as required for openings. 2.Cutting of structural support members will not be permitted without prior approval of the Design Professional. Extent of cutting shall be minimized; use core drills, power saws or other machines which will provide neat, minimum openings. 3.Patching shall match adjacent materials and surfaces and shall be performed by craftsmen skilled in the respective craft required. E.Conduits and wireways passing through all fire or smoke rated floors, roofs, walls, and partitions shall be provided with firestopping. Space between wall/floor and conduits, sleeves and/or wireways, shall be sealed with UL listed intumescent fire barrier material equivalent to rating of wall/floor. Where conduits, sleeves and/or wireways pass through floors, roofs, walls and partitions that are not fire or smoke rated, penetrations shall be sealed withgrout or caulk. 1.10MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A.All materials and equipment shall be the standard product of a reputable U.S.A. manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of the specified item unless authorized in writing by Design Professional. Where more than one unit is required of the same system, they shall be furnished by the same manufacturer except where specified otherwise. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B.All material and equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C.The equipmentspecifications cannot deal individually with any minute items such as parts, controls, devices, etc., which may be required to produce the equipment performance and function as specified, or as required to meet the equipment guarantees. Such items when required shall be furnished as part of the equipment, whether or not specifically called for. 1.11SHOP DRAWINGS A.Contractor shall furnish, to the Design Professional, complete sets of shop drawings and other submittal data. Contractor shall review and sign shop drawings before submittal. B.Shop drawings shall be bound into sets and cover related items for a complete system as much as practical and shall be identified with symbols or "plan marks" used on drawings. Incomplete, piecemeal or unbound submittals will be rejected. C.Submittals required by the various sections of the Project Manual include, but are not necessarily limited to those identified in the submittal schedule below. D.After award of contract, the contractor shall provide a completed submittal schedule including dates that the submittals will be to the Design Professionalfor review. E.Submit required information on the following items: CERTIFICATE OTHER OF SYSTEM SPECDETAILPRODINSTALLO & M(SEE DEMON- SECTIONEQUIPMENTDWGSDATASAMPLESMETHODSMANUALSTRATIONNOTES) Motor and Service 26 2815XX Disconnects Enclosed Switches 26 2816XX andCircuit Breakers Fuses NOTES: F.Design Professionalwill review shop drawings solely to assist contractors in correctly interpreting the plans and specifications. G.Contract requirements cannot be changed by shop drawings which differ from contract drawings and specifications. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.12OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A.Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted to the Design Professionalin duplicate upon completion of the job. Manuals shall be bound in a three ring hard-backed binder. Front cover and spine of each binder shall have the following lettering done: OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS (PROJECT NAME) (LOCATION) (DATE) SUBMITTED BY (NAME AND ADDRESS OF CONTRACTOR) B.Provide a master index at the beginning of manual showing items included. Use plastic tab indexes for sections of manual. Each section shall contain the following information for equipment furnished under this contract: 1.Equipment and system warranties and guarantees. 2.Installation instructions. 3.Operating instructions. 4.Maintenance instructions. 5.Spare parts identification and ordering list. 6.Local service organization, address, contact and phone number. 7.Shop drawings with reviewed stamp of Design Professionaland Contractor shall be included, if applicable, along with the items listed above. C.Items to be included shall be those listed in shop drawing section. 1.13TESTS AND DEMONSTRATIONS A.All systems shall be tested by Contractor and placed in proper working order prior to demonstrating systems to Owner. B.Contractor shall test the electrical grounding system resistance in accordance with Specification Section 26 0526 –Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systemsand submit a report to Design Professionalstating the results. C.Prior to acceptance of the electrical installation, the Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner, or his designated representatives, all essential features and functions of all systems installed, and shall instruct the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such systems. Owner instruction shall be provided for the following systems: SectionsDescriptionHrs. on SiteHrs. off SitePresented ByOthers PresentRemarks 26 2815Electrical Dist. System1Contractor1 REMARKS: 1.Perform complete system test at time of instruction. D.Contractor shall submit to the Design Professionala certificate signed by the Owner stating the date, time, and persons instructed and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. An example of a certificate form is as follows: ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010-5 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 CERTIFICATE OF SYSTEM DEMONSTRATION This document is to certify that the contractor has demonstrated the hereafter listed systems to the Owner's representatives in accordance with the Contract documents and that the instruction has been completed to the Owner's satisfaction. A.Project: B.System(s): C.Contractor's representatives giving instruction and demonstration: Contractor: _____________________________ NAMESDATEHOURS D.Owner's representatives receiving instruction: Owner: ________________________________ NAMESDATEHOURS E.Acknowledgement of demonstration: Contractor's Representative:___________________________ signature ___________________________ date Owner's Representative:___________________________ signature ___________________________ date ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010-6 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.14SUBSTITUTIONS A.Refer to Divisions00 and 01. B.Where substitutions are approved, Contractor assumes all responsibility for physical dimensions and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover allextra work necessitated by other trades as a result of the substitution. 1.15ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.In most cases, equipment specifications are based on a specific manufacturer's type, style, dimensional data, catalog number, etc. Listed with the base specification, either in the manual or on the plan schedules are acceptable manufacturers approved to bid products of equal quality. These manufacturers are encouraged to submit to Design Professionalat least 8 days prior to the bid due date drawings and catalog numbers of products to be bid as equals. B.Manufacturers,who do not submit prior to bidding, run the risk of having the product rejected at time of shop drawing submittal. Extra costs associated with replacing the rejected product shall be the responsibility of the Contractor and/or the manufacturer. C.If Contractor chooses to use a manufacturer listed as an equal, it shall be his responsibility to assure that the manufacturer has complied with the requirements in 'A' above. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for physical dimensions, operating characteristics, and all other resulting changes. This responsibility extends to cover all extra work necessitated by other trades as a result of using the alternate manufacturer. D.Where a model or catalog number is provided, it may not be inclusive of all product requirements. Refer to additional requirements provided on the plans or in the specifications as required. Similarly, there may be additional requirements included in the model or catalog number that are not specifically stated. These requirements shall also be met. 1.16GUARANTEE A.The entire electrical system including all sub-systems shall be guaranteed against defect in materials and installation for a minimum of one year. Any malfunctions which occur within the guarantee period shall be promptly corrected without cost to the Owner. This guarantee shall not limit or void any manufacturer's express or implied warranties. 1.17CHANGES IN THE WORK A.Refer to Divisions 00 and 01. B.The Owner, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, with the Contract Sum and the Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Contract Change Order and shall be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. C.The cost or credit to the Owner resulting from a change in the Work shall be determined by mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantial data to permit evaluation. A Change Order in excess of $300.00 shall be submitted with each item listed individually with a material cost and labor unit extension. Overhead and profit, as mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor shall be added to material and labor cost figures. D.It shall be the responsibility of the contractor before proceeding with any change to satisfy himself that the change has been properly authorized in behalf of the Owner. ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010-7 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 1.18COMPLETION A.Systems, at time of completion, shall be complete, efficiently operating, non-hazardous and ready for normal use by the Owner. B.When all the electrical work is complete Contractor shall thoroughly clean all material and equipment installed as a part of this contract and leave all equipment and material in new condition. C.Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all debris, excess material and equipment left during the progress of this contract at job completion. 1.19ACCESS DOORS A.When the Electrical Contractor provides any equipment requiring periodic servicing which will be concealed by non-accessible architectural construction, the Electrical Contractor shall provide a flush access door. The access door shall be equal to a KarpDSC-211 Universal access door or Nystrom APWB or type for the specific construction involved. B.Access doors in fire rated construction shall be fire rated and have U.L. label. C.Construction: 1.Door and trim shall be 13 gauge steel, frames shall be 16 gaugesteel. 2.Trim shall be of one piece construction. 3.Finish shall be prime coat of rust inhibitive baked grey enamel. 4.Hinges shall be concealed, offset, floating hinge. 5.Locks shall be flush, screwdriver operated with stainless steel cam-and-studs. 1.20TEMPORARY UTILITIES A.Refer to Specification Division 1 for specific requirements concerning temporary utilities. 1.21CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PADS A.Provide equipment housekeeping pads for all floor mounted equipment.Anchor equipment to concrete equipment pads according to equipment manufacturer’s recommendations. 1.Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated or as required to be 4 inches larger in both directions than supported unit.Pads to be a minimum of 4” in height unless noted otherwise. 2.Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor.Unless otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of the base. 3.Install epoxy-coated anchor bolts for supported equipment that extend through concrete base, and anchor into structural concrete floor. 4.Place and secure anchorage devices.Use supported equipment manufacturer’s setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 5.Install anchor bolts according to manufacturer’s recommendations and to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. 6.Use 3000-psi compressive strength concrete with #3 rebar 12” O.C. END OF SECTION 260010 ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0010-8 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 0500-COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED DOCUMENTS A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 -Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.This section includes the following: 1.Demolition. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MATERIALS A.All materials removed shall be the property of the removing contractor and shall be removed from the site unless otherwise specified. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01GENERAL A.Demolition shall be accomplished by the proper tools and equipment for the work to be removed. Personnel shall be experienced and qualified in the type of work to be performed. 3.02EXAMINATION A.Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. B.Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C.Demolition Drawings are based on casual field observation. Report discrepancies to Owner before disturbing existing installation. 3.03PREPARATION A.Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal. B.Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipmentor circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. C.Existing Electrical Services: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Obtain permission from Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. D.Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Notify Owner at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. Minimize outage duration. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 E.Existing Telephone System: Maintain existing system in service. Unless noted otherwise, all work associated with telephone system to be by Owner's Telecommunications Supplier. Contractor to coordinate timing and extent of demolition required. 3.04DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A.Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of this Section. B.Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction. Extend existing installations using materials and methods as specified. C.Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. D.Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. E.Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. F.Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. G.Maintain access to existing electrical installations which remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. H.Clean andrepair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused. 3.05WORK BY OTHERS A.Unless specifically noted under other contracts, Electrical Contractor shall assume all required work shall be performed by him. In general, the following will beperformed by others: 1.Mechanical Contractor will disconnect all mechanical services and remove pipe back to behind finish surfaces, close and cap ends of pipe. 3.06OWNER'S RIGHT OF SALVAGE A.Owner may designate and have salvage rights to any material herein demolished by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 26 0500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 26 0500-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 0519 -LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 -Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Contractor shall furnish all material, tools, labor and supervision necessary to install all wiring systems. B.This section describes the basic materials and methods of installation for general wiring systems of 600 volts and less. Wiring for a higher voltage rating, if required, shall be as specified in other sections or called for on the drawings. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wire, cable and connectors. B.UL Compliance: Comply with UL standards pertaining to wire, cable and connectors. C.UL Labels: Provide electrical wires, cables and connectors which have been UL-listed and labeled. D.NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA/Insulated Cable Engineers Association standards pertaining to materials, construction and testing of wire and cable. E.ANSI/ASTM: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI/ASTM standards pertaining to construction of wire and cable. F.The materials used for wiring systems shall be the products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of the specified material. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01WIRE AND CABLE A.All wire and cable for power, lighting, control and signal circuits shall have copper conductors of not less than 98% conductivity and shall be insulated to 600 V. Conductor sizes #10 AWG and smaller shall be solid, conductor sizes #8 AWG and larger shall be stranded. B.Minimum size conductors shall be #12 AWG for power and lighting. C.Type of wire and cable for various applications shall be as follows: 1.Type THWN, or XHHW (75 deg. C) -use for branch circuits, panel and equipment feeders in wet and dry locations. 2.Type THHN, or XHHW (90 deg. C) -use for branch circuits, panel and equipment feeders in dry locations only. Use where lighting branch circuit conductors are routed through fluorescent fixture channels. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS ANDCABLES 26 0519-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3.Type MTW, wet and dry locations -use for low voltage signal and control circuits operating at 25 volts or less. 4.Type UF -use where permitted by other sections or by the drawings for underground burial branch circuits. D.For all vibration type installations (i.e. motors, etc), provide stranded type conductors. 2.02CONDUCTOR COLOR CODING A.Wiring systems shall be color coded. Conductor insulation shall be colored in sizes up through #8 AWG, conductors #6 AWG and larger shall have black insulation and shall be phase color coded with one-half inch band of colored tape at all junctions and terminations. Colors shall be assigned to each conductor as described below and carried throughout all main and branch circuit distribution. When necessary to use tape, use colored tape on black wire. Do not use colored tape on colored wire. 277/480V. 120/208V.Y Phase 'A' ConductorBlackBrown Phase 'B' ConductorRedOrange Phase 'C' ConductorBlueYellow Neutral ConductorWhiteGrey Grounding ConductorGreenGreen 2.03CONNECTORS A.In-line splices and taps for conductor sizes #8 AWG and smaller, use 3M Co. "Scotchlock" vinyl insulated spring connectors, or equal Ideal "wingnut" or Thomas & Betts.Wago wire nuts are also acceptable. B.Connectors for conductors No. 6 and larger shall be of compression or split-bolt types, National Electric, Thomas & Betts, Blackburn or Burndy mechanical connectors. Fill connector voids with electrical insulation putty, follow with 3-M Scotch tape #33, minimum 2 layers. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01PREPARATION A.Wire shall not be installed in the conduit system until the building is enclosed and masonry work is completed. B.Conduit shall be swabbed free of moisture and debris prior to pulling in wiring.Pull mouse through conduits prior to pulling conductors. 3.02INSTALLATION A.All cable for major feedersshall be continuous from origin to termination, unless otherwise indicated. LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS ANDCABLES 26 0519-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B.Splices in branch circuit wires shall be made only in accessiblejunction boxes. C.All power feeder cable shall be pulled with the use of approved pulling compound or powder. Compound must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. D.Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable or rope which cannot damage raceway. E.Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural members and follow surface contours, where possible. F.Keep conductor splices to a minimum. G.The continuity of circuit conductors shall not be dependant on service connections such as lamp holders, receptacles, etc., where the removal of such devices would interrupt the continuity. H.Provide separate green ground conductor throughout entire electrical system. I.All branch circuits shall have dedicated neutrals. 3.03FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Prior to energizing system, test cable and wire for continuity of circuitry, and also for short circuits. Correct malfunctions when detected. B.Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuitry and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. END OF SECTION 26 0519 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS ANDCABLES 26 0519-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 0526-GROUNDINGAND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 -Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Extent of grounding work is indicated by drawings and shall comply with NEC. B.Applications of grounding work in this section include the following: 1.Service equipment. 2.Enclosures. 3.Equipment. C.Requirements of this section apply to electrical grounding work specified elsewhere in these specifications. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to materials and installation of electricalgrounding systems, associated equipment and wiring. Provide grounding products which are UL-listed and labeled. B.UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards Nos. 467 and 869 pertaining to electrical grounding and bonding. C.IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Standard 142 and 241 pertaining to electrical grounding. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01GROUNDING SYSTEMS A.Materials and Components 1.General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding systems indicated; with assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors, terminals (solderless lugs), grounding rods/electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional accessories needed for complete installation. Where more than one type unit meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products complying with NEC, UL, IEEE, and established industry standards for applications indicated. 2.Raceways: Provide raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings complying with Division 26, Section 26 0533 –Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems. 3.Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding conductors for grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC. GROUNDINGAND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING A.General: Install electrical grounding systems where shown, in accordance with applicable portions of NEC, with NECA's "Standardof Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements and serve intended functions. B.Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding system with other work. C.Install clamp-on connectors only on thoroughly cleaned metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity. D.Provide separate green ground conductor throughout entire electrical system sized as required by the NEC. END OF SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDINGAND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 0529-HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 -Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Provide materials, labor and supervision as necessary to provide hangers and supports for conduit, fixtures and equipment. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical supporting devices. B.ANSI/NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA Std. Pub. No. FB 1, "Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies". C.NECA Compliance: Comply with NationalElectrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation" pertaining to anchors, fasteners, hangers, supports, and equipment mounting. D.UL Compliance: Provide electrical components which are UL-listed and labeled. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01MANUFACTURED SUPPORTINGDEVICES A.General: Provide supporting devices; complying with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation; and as herein specified. Where more than one type of device meets indicated requirements, selection is Installer's option. B.Conduit Cable Supports: Provide cable supports with insulating wedging plug for non-armored type electrical cables in risers; construct for rigid metal conduit; type wire as indicated; construct body of malleable iron casting with hot dip galvanized finish. C.U-Channel Strut Systems: Provide U-channel strut system for supporting electrical equipment, 16-guage hot dip galvanized steel, of types and sizes indicated; construct with 9/16" dia. holes, 8" o.c. on top surface, with standard green finish, and with the following fittings which mate and match with U-channel: 1.Fixture hangers. 2.Channel hangers. 3.End caps. 4.Beam clamps. 5.Wiring stud. 6.Thinwall conduit clamps. 7.Rigid conduitclamps. 8.Conduit hangers. 9.U-bolts. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 D.Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide channel systems of one of the following: 1.B-Line Systems, Inc. 2.Thomas & Betts, Superstrut 3.Unistrut Div.; Tyco International 4.Globestrut PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES A.Install hangers, anchors, sleeves and seals as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to insure supporting devices comply with requirements. B.Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work. C.Conduit hangers and support devices shall be approved type for the method of supporting required. All hangers and supportsshall have galvanized finish or other approved corrosion resistance finish. In general, hangers and supports shall be as follows: 1.Where single or multiple run of conduit is routed on surface of structure; use conduit clamps mounted on U-channel strut soas to maintain not less than 1" clearance between conduit and structure. 2.Where single run of conduit is suspended from overhead; use split ring conduit clamp suspended by 3/8" steel drop rod. 3.Where multiple parallel runs of conduit are suspended from overhead; use split ring conduit clamps uniformly spaced and supported on trapeze hangers fabricated of U-channel strut, suspended by not less than two steel drop rods. 4.Where circuit voltage is above 600 volts, conduit clamps shall be provided with insulating bushings of dielectric strength as required. 5.Where conduit is buried in concrete floor topping; anchor conduit to structural floor with one hole jiffy clamps. 6.Maximum hanger and support spacing shall be in accordance with NEC. D.Hangers and supports shall be anchored to structure as follows: 1.Hangers and supports anchored to poured concrete, use malleable iron or steel concrete inserts attached to concrete forms. 2.Hangers or supports anchored to precast concrete, use self-drilling expansion shields. Expansion shields may be used where concrete inserts have been missed or additional support is required in poured concrete. 3.Hanger or supports anchored to structural steel, use beam clamps and/or steel channels as required by structural system. 4.Hangers or supports anchored to metal deck, use spring clips or approved welding pins. Maximum permissible load on each hanger shall not exceed 50 pounds. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 5.Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board partitions and walls. 6.Use sheet metal screws in sheet metal studs and wood screws in wood construction. E.The following is not permitted: 1.Attaching supports and hangers to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 2.Use of powder-actuated anchors. 3.Drilling of structural steel members. F.Fixtures on plastered or acoustical ceilings shall not be supported directly on ceiling tile. Provide metal bar hangers or U-channel strut attached to ceiling supports. G.Where disconnect switches and panels cannot be mounted on wall, provide support racks fabricated of structural steel or U-channel strut. H.Provide concrete bases and pads for transformers, switchgear, free standing panels, generators, outdoor lighting poles and other equipment requiring bases, except where drawings indicate that such bases and pads are to be furnished by the General Contractor. Furnish all equipment anchor bolts and installation for their proper and accurate location. All concrete work and reinforcing shall comply with General Specifications. END OF SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 0533-RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 -Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Contractor shall furnish all materials, tools labor and supervision necessary to fabricate and install complete conduit systems. B.Conduit systems shall be provided for all wiring, except where the drawings or other sections of the specifications indicate that certain wiring may be installed in cable trays, surface raceway, underfloor raceway, wireways and/or auxiliary gutters. C.Types of raceways in this section include the following: 1.Electricalmetallic tubing. 2.Flexible metal conduit. 3.Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. D.Provide factory painted red conduit for fire alarm system. E.Contractor shall furnish all material, tools, labor and supervision necessary to install electrical boxes and fittings as required by drawings and specifications. F.Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following: 1.Junction boxes. 2.Pull boxes. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertainingto raceways. B.UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with provisions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems; and provide products and components which have been UL-listed and labeled. C.NEC Compliance: Comply with requirements as applicable to construction and installation of raceway systems. D.The materials used in the fabrication of the raceway system shall be products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacturing of the specified material. E.NEC compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings. F.UL Compliance: Provide electrical boxes and fittings which have been UL-listed and labeled. G.ANSI/NEMA Standards Compliance: Comply with ANSI C 134.1 (NEMA Standards Pub No. OS 1) as applicable to sheet-steel outlet boxes, covers and box supports. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01CONDUIT A.General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways. B.Electrical Metallic Tubing: Thin wall, electrically welded cold rolled steel conduit, galvanized inside and out by electro galvanized process. Baked clear elastic enamel coating in and out. Use for installations in stud walls, masonry walls, above suspended ceilings and where exposed. Size limited to 21/2" and smaller. C.Flexible Metal Conduit: Formed of one continuous length of spirally wound electro galvanized steel strip. Use for final connections to all motor operated equipment such as unit heaters, fans, air handling units, pumps, generators, generator enclosuresand connections to dry type transformer, connections from junction boxes to lighting fixtures in accessible ceiling, and for wiring within casework and millwork. D.Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Formed of one continuous length of spirally wound steel strip, with water andoil tight neoprene jacket. Use for final connection to equipment listed in paragraph "D" above when located in wet areas. E.MC cable will not be allowed. 2.02CONDUIT FITTINGS A.Metallic Tubing Fittings: Compression type galvanized malleable iron or steel,water and concrete tight. B.Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Squeeze or screw type galvanized malleable iron or steel with nylon insulated throats. C.Liquidtight Flexible Conduit Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or steel, with watertight gaskets, "O" ring and retainer, and nylon insulated throats. D.Condulet Fittings: Exposed conduit fittings shall be condulet type for all sharp turns, tees, etc. E.Observe National Electrical Code requirements for insulated bushings on 1-1/4 inch and larger conduits. Double locknuts and fibre bushings with threads fully engaged are required. 1-1/4 inch and larger EMT connectors, if used, must also accommodate insulated bushings with threads fully engaged. T & B "Insuline" or Appleton insulated throat connectors are acceptable in lieu of separate bushings. F.Provide Sealtite for the last 3’ of feeder/circuit for all vibration type equipment (i.e. motors, transformers, etc). 2.03WIREWAYS A.General: Provide electrical raceways of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses), number of channels, for each type service indicated. Provide complete assembly of raceway including, but not necessarily limited to, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold down straps, end caps, and other components and accessories as needed for complete system. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable provisions of NEC for electrical raceways. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2.04PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A.Construction, sizes and installation of pull and junction boxes shall comply with NEC, Article 370. B.Pull and junction boxes not specifically described in NEC, Article 370, shall be fabricated of heavy gauge galvanized steel with screw or hinged covers,and equipped with corrosion resistant screws and hardware. C.Pull and junction boxes for installation in poured concrete floors shall be flush type, cast iron, with watertight gasketed covers. Boxes for installation in floors with tile or carpet floor covering shall have recessed covers to accommodate the floor covering. D.Pull and junction boxes for outdoor installation shall be raintight. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATIONOF RACEWAY A.In general, all horizontal runs of branch circuit conduit shall be installed in ceiling plenum. Conduit for convenience outlets, wall mounted fixtures and other wall outlets shall be routed overhead and dropped through wall to the outlet. Branch circuit conduit shall not be installed in concrete floor slabs except where conditions will not permit the conduit to be installed overhead. B.Generally, all conduit shall be concealed, except in crawl spaces, tunnels, shafts, mechanical equipment rooms, and at connection to surface panels and free standing equipment, and as otherwise noted. C.Exposed conduit and conduit concealed in ceiling space shall be routed in lines parallel to building construction. D.All conduit runs above suspended acoustical ceilings shall be routed so as not to interfere with tile panel removals with 4'0" to 6'0" flexible conduitdrops from an independent junction box, accessible from below the ceiling, to ceiling mounted equipment. E.Minimum size conduit shall be 3/4" trade size except all home runs to panels shall be minimum 1". Where specified size is not called for on drawings or in the specifications, conduit shall be sized per NEC. F.Install the conduit system mechanically and electrically continuous from outlet to outlet and to all cabinets, junction or pull boxes. Conduit shall enter and be secured to all cabinets and boxes in such a manner that all parts of the system will have electrical continuity. PVC conduit shall not be installed above grade unless noted otherwise. G. H.Support conduit raceway systems in accordance with requirements as set forth in the National Electric Code. 3.02INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND FITTINGS A.Install electrical boxes and fittings where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B.Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway installation work. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 3.03PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION A.Install pull boxes, junction boxes and auxiliary wiring gutters where indicated on drawings and where required to facilitate installation of the wiring. B.For concealed conduit, install boxes flush with ceiling or wall, with covers accessible and easily removable. Where flush boxes are installedin finish ceilings or walls, provide cover which shall exceed the box face dimensions by a sufficient amount to allow no gap between boxand finished material. C.Boxes shall not be located in finished, occupied rooms, without prior approval of Design Professional. END OF SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0533-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 0553-IDENTIFICATIONFOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 -Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Contractor shall provide identification for wiring systems and equipment as called for in this section. B.Types of electrical identification specified in this section include the following: 1.Conduitcolor banding. 2.Cable conductor identification. 3.Equipment/system identification signs. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.UL Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical marking and labeling identification systems. B.NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation of identifying labels and markers for wiring and equipment. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A.General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. Where more than single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each application. B.Color-Coded Conduit Markers 1.General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, flexible or semi-rigid, permanent, plastic-sheet conduit markers, extending 360 degrees around conduits; designed for attachment to conduit by adhesive, adhesive lap joint of marker, matching adhesive plastic tape at each end of marker,or pretensioned snap-on. Except as otherwise indicated, provide lettering which indicates voltage, [panel and circuit] of conductor(s) in conduit. 2.Colors: a.120/208 volt:gray b.277/480 volt:orange c.Fire alarm:*red * Factory painted. 3.For conduits above ceilings, spray painting of boxes and portions of conduit is acceptable in lieu of banding. For 120/208 volt branch circuits, mark circuit numbers on all junction/pull boxes. IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.Cable/Conductor Identification Bands 1.General: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl-cloth self-adhesive cable/conductor markers of wrap-around type; either pre-numbered plastic coated type, or write-on type with clear plastic self-adhesive cover flap; numbered to show circuit identification. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION A.General Installation Requirements 1.Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require finish, install identification after completion of painting. B.Conduit Identification 1.Conduit above accessible ceiling spacesshall be identified per 2.01 B. 2.Where electrical conduit is exposed in spaces with exposed mechanical piping which is identified by a color-coded method, apply color-coded identification on electrical conduit in a manner similar to piping identification. 3.Identify junction and pullboxes of systems withstencil letteringfor panel and circuit numbers or system type. C.Cable/Conductor Identification 1.General: Apply cable/conductor identification on each cable and conductor in each box/enclosure/cabinet where wires ofmore than one circuit or communication/signal system are present, except where another form of identification (such as color-coded conductors) is provided. Match identification with marking system used in panelboards, shop drawings, contract documents and similar previously established identification for project electrical work. D.Equipment/System Identification 1.General: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign on each major unit of electrical equipment in building; including central or master unit of each electrical system including communication/signal systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification or signal system. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, 1/2" high lettering on 1-1/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required), white lettering in black field. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work. a.Motordisconnects & starters. 1.Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate the substrate. END OF SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 2815-MOTOR AND SERVICE DISCONNECTS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 -General Requirements and Section 26 0010 -Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.In general, disconnect switches are indicated on the drawings, and it shall be the Electrical Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install all disconnect switches for equipment and motors furnishedby him, and for equipment and motors furnished by others. 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical motor and circuit disconnect switches. B.UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide motor and circuit disconnect switches which have been UL-listed and labeled. C.NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds. Pub. No.KS 1. 1.04SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations, for each type of motor and circuit disconnect switch required. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following manufacturers: 1.Bussman 2.General Electric 3.Square D Co. 4.Cutler Hammer 2.02DISCONNECTS A.All disconnects shall be heavy duty type unless noted otherwise. B.Disconnects for fractional horsepower motors larger than 1/2 horsepower, for integral horsepower motors, and for equipment of similar capacity shall break all ungrounded conductors and shall be quick-make, quick-break with interlocking covers. C.Disconnects installed indoors shall have NEMA 1 enclosures, disconnects installed outdoors or in wet locations shall have raintight NEMA 3R enclosures. D.Alldisconnects shall be of the fuse type, except where drawings indicate non-fuse type (N.F.). MOTOR AND SERVICE DISCONNECTS 26 2815-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION OF MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECT SWITCHES A.Install motor and circuit disconnect switches where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B.Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances, and motors and controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise indicated. END OF SECTION 26 2815 MOTOR AND SERVICE DISCONNECTS 26 2815-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 2816-ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 -Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Provide circuit breakers, fuses and motor overload relays and install indisconnect switches and motor starters as required for proper overcurrent protection for servicefeeders, branch feeders, branch circuits, motors, transformers and other equipment requiring protection. B.Overcurrent protection shall be provided for each conductor and all equipment to open the circuit if the current reaches a value that will cause an excessive or dangerous temperature in conductors or conductor insulation. Circuit breakers shall have frame and trip ratings as scheduled on drawings. C.Types of overcurrent protective devices in this section include the following: 1.Circuit breakers 1.03QUALITY ASSURANCE A.NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction and installation of overcurrent protective devices. B.UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 489, "Molded-Case Circuit Breakers and Circuit Breaker Enclosures", and UL 198D, "High-Interrupting-Capacity Class K Fuses". Provide overcurrent protective devices which are UL listed and labeled. C.NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Std. Pub. Nos. AB 1, AB 2, and SG 3 pertaining to molded-case and low voltage power-type circuit breakers. D.ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI C97.1 pertaining to low voltage cartridge fuses. 1.04SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on overcurrent protective devices, including: amperes, voltages and current ratings, interrupting ratings, current limitations, internal inductive and non-inductive loads, time-current trip characteristic curves, and mounting requirements. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1.Circuit Breakers a.General Electric Co. ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 B.All similar products shall be of the same manufacturer. 2.02CIRCUIT BREAKERS A.General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide circuit breakers and ancillary components, of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, components, and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation. B.Circuit Breakers -Branch Circuit Panelboards: 1.Branch circuit breakers up to 150 amperes shall be GE to match existing panelboards. Breakers shall be plug-on type toggle action with quick-make, quick-break mechanism. Trip indication shall be clearly shown by the breaker handle taking a position between on and off when the breaker is tripped and by a highly visible red tripped circuit indicator. All multi-pole breakers shall be single-operated handle, internal common trip. Breakers having handle ties but not factory labeled "common trip" will be rejected. UL Class A ground fault circuit protection shall be provided on 120V AC branch circuits as specified on the plans or panelboard schedule. This protection shall be an integral part of the branch circuit breaker which also provides overload and short circuit protection for branch circuit wiring. Single pole 15 and 20 ampere circuit breakers shall be UL listed as "Switching Breakers" at 120V AC and carry the SWD marking. Tandem or "piggyback" breakers providing two circuits from one pole space are prohibited. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION OF OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A.Install overcurrent protective devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards for installation of overcurrent protective devices. B.Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of overcurrent protective devices with other work. END OF SECTION 26 2816 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 26 2816-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 SECTION 26 2923-VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01RELATED WORK A.The requirements of Division 00 -Procurement and Contracting Requirements, Division 01 - General Requirements and Section 26 0010 -Electrical General Provisions are applicable to work required of this section. 1.02DESCRIPTION OF WORK A.Variable speed AC motor controllers and all power wiring. Control wiring and system control components by others. B.Variable speed AC motor controllers shall be of the "Variable/Adjustable Frequency" or "Inverter" type drives based on solid state electronics. The adjustable frequency AC drive shall convert 3 phase, 60 Hertz input power to an adjustable AC frequency and voltage 3 phase output for controlling the speed of anyNEMAMG 1 Design Bsquirrel cage induction motor. The adjustable frequency drive shall have the following basic design: 1.Converter -Converter shall consist of a modular assembly consisting of a diode rectifier and capacitor assembly which will first convert, then filter and maintain a fixed DC voltage source from the fixed voltage and frequency input. 2.Inverter -Inverter shall consist of a modular assembly consisting of power semiconductors for generation of a sine-coded pulse width modulated (PWM) output waveform. 3.Regulator -Regulator shall consist of a modular assembly. The regulator shall be fully digital and incorporate a microprocessor to control all inverter, converter, and external interface functions. 4.Interface -Interface shall consist of terminal strips for all input and output signals. C.All control instrument components shall be electronic and of industrial control quality and furnished with variable speed motor controllers complete as outlined in these specifications and drawings. D.The variable speed motor controller supplier shall provide all necessary factory and/or field labor for complete calibration and adjustment of the adjustable frequency drives and control components, and shall be responsible for setting all control set points, operatingsequences, and alarming systems within the specified control systems to produce the overall system performance as specified. 1.03SUBMITTALS A.Submittal data shall include but not be limited to drawings and/or catalog cuts giving physical dimensions, wiring diagrams (control and power diagrams), construction materials, capacities, ratings, control sequencing, manufacturers recommended installation instructions, and any other pertinent information. B.Provide operating and maintenance manuals. VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 2923-1 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 C.Provide recommendedspare parts list and prices. Also, the address of the manufacturer's closest parts stocking location shall be provided. D.Include manufacturer’s standard product warranty (for not less than a one year period) for replacement of materials and equipment. 1.04START-UP SERVICE A.The supplier of the variable speed motor controller shall have a factory trained service representative provide start up service and commissioning. B.Contractor shall coordinate controller parameters with other contractors. 1.05TRAINING A.The supplier of the variable speed motor controller shall have a factory trained service representative provide eight (8) hours of on-site training for the Owner's personnel advising of the proper methods of maintenance and operation of the controller. B.Additional training time as deemed necessary by the Owner's authorized representative may be obtained from the supplier on a negotiated basis with the Owner. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A.The variable speed AC motor controllers shall meet all requirements ofthis section. Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable manufacturers are as follows: 1.Toshiba/Houston 2.ABB 3.Cutler Hammer 4.General Electric 2.02CONTROLLERS A.General: For the purpose of this Part, the word "controller" shall mean variable speed AC motor controller. B.The controller shall be mounted in a NEMAventilated enclosureappropriate for environment. The enclosure size shall be adequate to dissipate the heat generated by the controller within the limits of the specified environmental operating conditions. The door shall be hinged, secured with latch. "Bolt-on" doors are not acceptable. C.Ambient service temperature rating shall be from 0 The controller shall operate at less than 90% relative humidity non-condensing. The controller shall operate at an altitude less than 1000 meters (3300 feet) above sea level. D.Input power rating shall be 3 Phase, 208Volts +/-10%, 60 Hertz +/-3%. E.The controller shall have a door interlocked incoming AC disconnect with external operator handle which is capable of being locked in the "off" position. The disconnect shall shutdown all input power to both the drive and the bypass circuitry. F.The controller shall have the input fused internally with standard fuses. VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 2923-2 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 G.Controller shall have an output frequencyrange of 6 to 66 Hertz and a 11:1 speed range. The frequency regulation shall be +/-.5% of maximum frequency. H.The controller shall provide thermal overload relays on the inverter output for motor protection for each motor controlled. I.The controller shall maintain power factor to .95 or greater throughout its speed range for each motor controlled. J.The controller shall have as a minimum the following protective features: 1.Short circuit protection. 2.Under/over voltage protection. 3.Automatic restarting after a power outage or momentary overvoltage. 4.Ground fault protection, but there shall be no automatic restart into ground fault. 5.Overcurrent protection. 6.Supply voltage phase loss protection. 7.Over temperature protection. 8.Startinto rotating motor protection. The controller shall catch a spinning load without tripping. K.The controller shall be rated for 100% continuous current. The controller shall be capable of providing 110% of rated current for a minimum period of one minute. The controller shall have adjustable current limit. The controller shall have current limited stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, and run conditions. L.The controller shall have process follower inputs for 4-20 mA. Provide bias and gain adjustments for the follower. M.The controller shall provide adjustable linear acceleration and deceleration control, each separately adjustable. The ramp time shall be adjustable from 0.1 to 30 seconds. Longer ramp times shall be optionally available. N.The controller shall provide maximum and minimum frequency control, each separately adjustable. O.The controller shall have internal manually operated bypass circuitry for direct line motor operation. Provide an inverter/line selector switch on the front panel to transfer the motor from the adjustable speed drive to the power line, or from the line to the inverter at zero speed. Motor protection and other safety devices shall be operative in both inverter and line modes. P.The controller shall have a motor contactor at the inverter output. The controller shall also have three contactor bypasses. Q.Fault indicators shall indicate the following fault conditions: 1.Overcurrent. 2.Short circuit. 3.Undervoltage. 4.Overvoltage. 5.Overtemperature. 6.Regulator function error. 7.Ground fault. VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 2923-3 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 In addition to the fault indicators, the controller shall provide normally open Form C fault contacts to allow remote monitoring of drive conditions. R.The controller shall have as a minimum the following operator controls mounted on the front panel: 1.Manual/Auto selector. 2.Start/Stop switch. 3.Inverter/Line switch. 4.Speed potentiometer. 5.Fault reset. 6.Speed Indicator. S.The controller shall provide adjustable carrier frequency. T.The controller shall have an internal line reactor and EMI/RFI filters. U. Controller shall have serial communications capability with the building automation system via BACnet TCP/IP protocol. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01INSTALLATION OF CONTROLLERS A.Install controllers as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. B.Coordinate with other work including motor and HVAC controls work, as necessaryto interface installation of controllers with other work. C.The controllers shall be mounted and installed on the mechanical equipment room walls whenever possible. When the controllers cannot be wall mounted, the controllers shall be installed on four inch housekeeping pads. Installation of units directly on the floor will not be acceptable. D.Each controller shall have a dedicated raceway for the input power feeder, output power feeder and controls. Raceway shall be separated by at least 6” from other controller feeders and controls raceway. E.Equipment manufacturer factory authorized service agent shall be responsible for on-site assistance to the temperature control contractor and the temperature control programmer with device addressing and confirming that the unit communicates with the FMCS as specified. Coordinate with the Controls Contractor and City of Iowa City IT Departmentfor specific BACnet and internet protocol addresses that are to be set in lieu of the factory default address. 3.02OPERATION A.Manual/Auto System Operation 1.Selector switch in MANUAL mode -operation shall be from the door mounted potentiometer and the system shall be operable from 0-100% on the potentiometer operating between the minimum and maximum speeds as set in the inverter. VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 2923-4 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 2.Selector switch in AUTO mode -operation shall be from the input follower signal, with output speed being proportional to the input signal. A remote set of Form C start/stop contacts (furnished by the Temperature Controls Contractor) shall control the inverter. B.Start/Stop 1.Switch used to initiate command to start or stop the drive; operates in manual mode. C.Inverter/Line 1.Selector switch in the LINE mode shall disconnect the adjustable frequency system and bypass for direct across-the-line motor operationto the 3 phase, 60 Hertz supply. 2.Selector switch in the INVERTER mode shall disconnect the 3 phase, 60 Hertz supply and the system shall operate in the mode as established by the inverter Manual/Auto switch. D.Automatic Restart 1.In the event of a loss of supply line power, or an overvoltage/undervoltage condition of more than 5%, or in the event of a shutdown signal from the temperature control or fire detection system, the system shall shut down. When line power is restored, the system shall automaticallyrestart after a time delay, providing the start contact is a maintained contact in the closed position and all external interlocks are satisfied. 2.For motors started frequently, the system shall provide start at almost zero RPM and gradually increase to required speed. 3.03ADJUST AND CLEAN A.Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement. B.Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. 3.04FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A.Subsequent to wire/cable hook-up, energize controllers and demonstrate functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements; where necessary correct malfunctioning units. END OF SECTION 26 2923 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 2923-5 CITY OF IOWA CITYDE #14006 CITY HALL NORTH COURT HVAC REPLACEMENT PROJECT 2014 VARIABLE-FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLLERS 26 2923-6